Tag Archives: Dr. Seth Farber

Promoting the COVID Psy Op: Neil MacFarquhar of The New York Times Ignores the Facts & Pushes False-Narratives

Op-ed | Ramola D | 28 March, 2021

Desperation must be scenting the air in the newsrooms at The New York Times if a former bureau chief from Libya (no background in science) with a resume that reeks of #MockOp, CIA Central should be tasked to issue an op-ed frantically seeking to quell the rapid spread of information worldwide on the numbers of deaths and cases of disability rising post-COVID-vaccine, calling in panic to all the gods of Falsehood bandied about by the Falsehood Maestros over at the Federal Bureau of Running Terror & Smear Operations to Subjugate America: Extremism, Far-Rightism, Q-Anonism, White Nationalism, now being smudge-fudged by Neil M with Anti-Vaccinism.

Anti-Vaccinism, of course, is seen as primordial sin over in the New York Zionist Publishing Industry zone of all-non-science-based literati right alongside the pseudoscience-immersed “experts” quoted often by the fluffy-haired anchors at CNN, CBS, ABC, NBC et al in their quest to lift Fauci to the level of Pharaoh and state Governors citing Fauci to the level of demi-Gods issuing needed decrees to subjugate the citizenry with all the paraphernalia of Psy Op pushed by our current One World Governance disguised as separate-nation-states: suffocation-masks, self-isolating, and seriously toxic gene-deforming vaccines.

Newsbreak 109: Dr. Ariyana Love Shatters the Myths Around the COVID Psy Op

COVID Psy Op Needs to Stop Right Now: Children Are Dying From the Masks, Children Are Committing Suicide

Berlin Police Agree the Masks Are a Sham, Real Enemy is Bill Gates & COVID’s Transhumanist, Sterilizing Control Agenda

COVID-19, a Dangerous Conspiracy That’s Gotten Out of Hand

The “science” of vaccines is only now being critically investigated en masse online, with numbers of doctors, molecular biologists, journalists, information analysts, historians delving deeper into the history of vaccination in the US and Europe, as well as worldwide, the part played by the Rockefeller clan in drug-creation, pharmaceutical-company-promotion, medical-school-industry-creation to promote drugs and vaccines, the general rise of Big Pharma, the eugenicist aims and actions of the vaccine industry, and the sad truth about the horrors of vaccine injury, the vast numbers of vaccine-injured and “SIDS”-deaths, the neuro-degradation, disability-creation, and immune-system-assault accomplished by mandatory vaccines on American children over the past 50 years.

Report 238 | Paul Anthony Taylor, Dr. Rath Health Foundation: The Corporatization of Public Health

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part One

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Two

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Three

Dr. Suzanne Humphries’ deep-dive into vaccination history and harms was never more needed than now, to educate all as to where exactly the Public Health focus on vaccines has come from, and how it has caused infinite harm to American and worldwide health.

Anti Vaccination Rally in 1920/Dissolving Illusions Website

The deliberate privileging of the Germ Theory over the Terrain Theory by the pharmaceutical industry, which latter homeopaths, naturopaths, holistic physicians successfully use to this day as guiding light in their understanding and treatment of the human body underlies the WHO, CDC, and NIH’s manic focus on viruses and pandemics, clarified by Canadian homeopathic doctor in this vital report, Report #169: Zara Bourgeois, Homeopath, Tackles COVID-19 Deception- Faulty Tests & Ignoring Terrain, as also in an earlier interview with this writer, Report #162: Zara Anne Bourgeois, Homeopath:Vaccine Risks/Harms, Natural Remedies, Immunity, Healing.

To be anti-vaccine today, with all the new information at our fingertips now of what exactly is in vaccines, what vaccine injury is, and how many millions have been harmed over the years by vaccines, is not exactly being anti-intellectual, conspiratorial, or ignorant but the opposite. As Dr. John Reizer asks indeed, in Newsbreak 107, why would people Not be anti-vaccine today, given the facts of vaccine damage?

Newsbreak 107 | Feb 12, 2021 | Unsafe Vaccines in Light of Vaccine Injuries: Focus on COVID Vaccine Adverse Events & Deaths with Dr. John Reizer

However, Neil MacFarquhar makes no mention of any of this. Suffice to dismiss the entire field of critical enquiry into the safety, efficacy, and Pharmaganda promotional history of vaccines pejoratively as “anti-vaccine” and then rush quickly to citing generic “experts” with no information whatsoever on why these particular ones are chosen over others, those others in fact who question all vaccines and those who question these mRNA vaccines in particular–determined by Dr. David Martin and Dr. Judy Mikovits to be “the injection of a chemical pathogen,” referred to by Dr. Andy Wakefield, Dr. Carrie Madej, Dr. Sherrie Tenpenny, Dr. Andy Kaufmann as genetic engineering, mRNA “gene-therapy,” and described by Professor Dolores Cahill, Dr. Sherri Tenpenny, Dr. Christiane Northrup as drug-treatments designed to invoke “cytokine storms” via pathogenic priming, and auto-immune-disease creation as immune-systems become primed to attack the cells of the human body.

What exactly is the cytokine storm/Dr. Dolores Cahill

Dr. Rima Laibow, Open Source Truth: Dr. Wakefield Explains mRNA “Vaccine” is NOT a Vaccine, IS Genetic Engineering

COVID Vaccine Intended to Destroy the Human Genome and Humanity

CODE RED: Dr. Carrie Madej: “Moratorium Needed on All Pfizer/Moderna mRNA COVID-19 Vaccines” Now Seen To Produce Deadly Side-Effects Including Death–Experimental, High-Risk, Sterilizing, Dangerous!

Dr. Mohammad Iqbal Adil: NHS Surgeon Fired for Revealing COVID-19 Is Not A Real Disease & Mere Cover for a Transhumanizing, Sterilizing GMO Vaccine

Auto-Immune Disease, Genetic Modification of Humans, Transhumanism, Death and Disability from Vaccine

The breakdown of the natural human immune system — which thousands of doctors, naturopaths, holistic medicine practitioners worldwide do not believe needs the “priming, education, prompting” of toxins in vaccines (and all vaccines contain toxins) to activate — and the genetic modification of humans are both intended by the mRNA vaccines, where synthetically-manufactured messenger RNA literally provokes the body’s immune system to turn upon itself, as Dr. Carrie Madej describes in this interview with journalist and broadcaster David Sorensen, posted here: COVID Vaccine Intended to Destroy the Human Genome and Humanity

Transhumanism via vaccine is an openly published intention of the World Economic Forum’s Klaus Schwab in his COVID-19 The Great Reset tome of doom for humanity, yet Neil MacFarquhar, with his years of experience as a reporter covering the Middle East (and fixated on “extremists”) fails to question this intention and imposition by governments dancing to the tune of Schwab and his billionaire buddies dreaming of Techno Enslavement 701 and Full Spectrum Biosurveillance at the level of the human cell.

Au contraire, Mr. MacFarquhar assiduously pushes the cyborg agenda of misled governments as he pushes “faith in government” and “return to normal” via, presumably, the touted markers of apartheid, “vaccine passports” which Israeli dictator Netanyahu has rolled out today in Israel, insidious encroachment of fascism which truth-journalist and news-analyst Shai Danon calls out as crime against humanity in this recent interview: Newsbreak 113: Shai Danon Describes the Medical Apartheid in Israel, Urges People To Stop Complying

“The more vaccine opponents succeed in preventing or at least delaying herd immunity, experts noted, the longer it will take for life to return to normal and that will further undermine faith in the government and its institutions.”

Neil MacFarquhar, New York Times, Far-Right Extremists Move From ‘Stop the Steal’ to Stop the Vaccine/March 26, 2021

Does Mr. MacFarquhar sound like a thoughtfully enquiring reporter working for an independent news outlet or a shill for “the government and its institutions” reliant on vague “experts”?

But then of course the New York Times is neither independent nor a news outlet but a full-spectrum propaganda creation factory which admittedly runs its stories by US government, in fond continuance of Operation Mockingbird and the CIA’s deep-dish hold on all corporate media outlets:

NY Times admits it sends some stories to US government for approval before publication/Ben Norton, The Gray Zone/June 24, 2019

The greatest failure of course of Mr. Farquhar’s op-ed which seeks urgently to draw connections between the concocted characters of “far-right extremism,” “Capitol rioters” (whom he does not trace back to the crisis-actors and “surveillance role players” of the FBI/DHS and the CIA’s Op CHAOS, as most unbiased analysts do), “rightwingers,” “paramilitary organizations,” “Proud Boys,” “Boogaloos,” “Q-Anons,”and “anti-vaccine activists” is his refusal to examine closely the actual deaths and adverse events from the Pfizer, Moderna, and AstraZeneca vaccines recorded in the CDC’s VAERS, which he posits as his prime focus in his opening paragraph and keeps making vague reference to but never dissects:

“Adherents of far-right groups who cluster online have turned repeatedly to one particular website in recent weeks — the federal database showing deaths and adverse reactions nationwide among people who have received Covid-19 vaccinations.”

“Last spring, a common purpose among far-right activists and the anti-vaccination movement first emerged during armed protests in numerous state capitols against coronavirus lockdown measures. That cross-pollination expanded over time.”

“In the months since inoculations started in December, the alliance grouping extremist organizations with the anti-vaccination movement has grown larger and more vocal, as conspiracy theories about vaccines proliferated while those about the presidential vote count receded.”

Neil MacFarquhar, New York Times, Far-Right Extremists Move From ‘Stop the Steal’ to Stop the Vaccine/March 26, 2021

The only close mention of VAERS that Mr. MacFarquhar makes rushes glibly through a few statistics from a few weeks ago, while rushing immediately back to the safety of “scientists and medical professionals” who, he implies, we, the reader-public must all trust to interpret raw data for us, while we stand helplessly by, blinding ourselves.

Use of the passive and couching of lies in hyperbole appears to be his go-to tool for glib persuasion of the blinded unaware: “The Covid-19 vaccines in use, like most vaccinations, are considered overwhelmingly safe…” (By who, Neil?)

“Numerous channels link to the government website called VAERS, for Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System, to energize followers. It had reported 2,216 deaths among people vaccinated for the three months before March 22, with 126 million doses administered. The Covid-19 vaccines in use, like most vaccinations, are considered overwhelmingly safe, but inevitably a small percentage of recipients suffer adverse reactions, some of them severe. The deaths have not been directly linked to the vaccinations.

The raw, incomplete VAERS statistics are meant for scientists and medical professionals, but are widely used among extremist groups to try to undermine confidence in the vaccine.”

Neil MacFarquhar, New York Times, Far-Right Extremists Move From ‘Stop the Steal’ to Stop the Vaccine/March 26, 2021

Misplaced Complacency in Dismissing Unexamined Fact as Conspiracy Theory

The mention of “conspiracy theories” of course gives Neil MacFarquhar away as proponent of a CIA Psy Op designed to deceive. It’s truly curious how those who seek to publish false-narratives and clear disinformation rely today on the free and easy shorthand of this term, while imagining they have successfully led their readers away from deeper exploration of the subject with this mud-slinging fudge-making label.

The glossing over of adverse reactions to the mRNA vaccines including increasing numbers of deaths is quite frankly, inexplicable. Why would anyone ignore the facts–unless they had an agenda to protect, that is?

“Although negative reactions have been relatively rare, the numbers are used by many extremist groups to try to bolster a rash of false and alarmist disinformation in articles and videos with titles like “Covid-19 Vaccines Are Weapons of Mass Destruction — and Could Wipe out the Human Race” or “Doctors and Nurses Giving the Covid-19 Vaccine Will be Tried as War Criminals.””

Neil MacFarquhar, New York Times, Far-Right Extremists Move From ‘Stop the Steal’ to Stop the Vaccine/March 26, 2021

Unwilling to examine the data, unable therefore to clarify how anyone’s articles or videos could be false or alarmist or disinformative, casually labeling anyone he pleases an “extremist group,” this reporter’s opinion piece ultimately stands on purely flaky ground.

The truth about the deaths and disabilities due to this vaccine are being considered in greater detail by other writers and analysts who focus on the facts, which currently point to great need for concern. How many nurses fainting on-camera, dying off-camera, collapsing in an hour, two hours, two weeks are needed before someone calls these vaccines UNSAFE, not safe?

Shall we just tot up the stats on deaths against the “millions of doses” already injected into American arms–many of them placebos, Shai Danon suggests; some of them indeed placebos, Dr. Carrie Madej suggests, since these vaccinations currently are open clinical trials running double-blind with placebos being included–and call them “relatively rare” MacFarq-style, and rest complacent? Or shall we protect our children’s lives, our elders’ lives, our own lives by just saying NO to these lethal vaccines?

“What other product do we know of on the market,” asks Dr. Christiane Northrup in News Panel 17, “that would not be immediately removed off the shelves given the numbers of deaths, cases of paralysis, strokes, Bell’s palsy we are seeing, but a vaccine?”

Such is the diabolical power of the pharmaceutical industry that 1) the vaccines continue to be handed out 2) governments continue to push them and 3) recklessly endangering reporters like Neil MacFarquhar consent to promoting the COVID Psy Op on the American and world populace, without a care that the False-Narratives being promoted could actually lead to people’s blind trust being reinforced and result in their deaths or disability from these vaccines.

News Panel 17: Women’s Power in Humanity Rising : You Have to Stand Up to Stop the Tyranny and Crime | Use the Power of the Spoken and Written Word

The Fact is: People are Indeed Dying, Convulsing, Stroking After Taking the Pfizer, Moderna, AstraZeneca mRNA GMO Vaccines

The latest data, marking last week’s cumulation of deaths and disability recorded at the CDC VAERS website:

Mass Deception by Governments Promoting a Lethal Vaccine While Deaths Pile Up at VAERS, CDC Website

Desperate Attempts by Twitter and Facebook to Suppress the Deadly Truth About Pfizer & Moderna’s mRNA Vaccines as More Disturbing Videos of Disabling Vibration/Spasms/Coma & Deaths Post-Vaccine Surface

Newsbreak 107 | Feb 12, 2021 | Unsafe Vaccines in Light of Vaccine Injuries: Focus on COVID Vaccine Adverse Events & Deaths with Dr. John Reizer

Dangers of ALL Vaccines Highlighted as Deaths and Injuries From the Experimental mRNA COVID Vaccines Pile Up

Dr. Vernon Coleman: How Many People Are The Vaccines Killing?

The mRNA COVID-19 Vaccines Need to Be Halted Immediately: Increasing Evidence of Danger to Public Health

Do Not Take the COVID-19 Vaccines: Reports & Videos of Convulsions, Seizures, Palsy, Death Are Increasing

The perfidy of governments is daily being made evident in vaccine drives, lockdowns, mask mandates, vaccine passports, business shutdowns and lies, yet Neil MacFarquhar, citing public-relations enterprises such as Institute for Research and Education on Human Rights, Card Strategies, and Network Contagion Research Institute — whose cited “report” on “institutional distrust” and “viral disinformation of the COVID vaccine” warrants its own teardown shortly — projects a touching belief in the virtues of government as he uses the New York Times MO of dispassionate-observation-from-afar and recounts the awakened questioning of vaccines in deprecating tones, equating all with “far-rightism”: “Apocalyptic warnings about the vaccine feed into the far-right narrative that the government cannot be trusted, the sentiment also at the root of the Jan. 6 Capitol riot.”

Readers of the New York Times would be far better served examining the raw data themselves and beginning to think on their feet about the dangers of these vaccines, and whether they truly want to visit death and disability upon themselves, as Mr. MacFarquhar’s irresponsible op-ed promotes. Stepping out of the false left-right paradigm promoted by shadow-government-run media and stepping far away from the False-Narratives run by the FBI on extremism and terrorism and striving to link those falsely with the clear analytical thinking of anti-vaccine enquiry might also help.

RELATED

Worldwide Medical Tyranny in Finland Under COVID Regulations/Dr. Ariyana Love, Liberty Beacon

WORLD PUBLIC HEALTH EMERGENCY! Stop Big Pharma’s DNA “Vaccine” Experiment!/Dr. Ariyana Love

Faith, Trust, or Science – The COVID Vaccine, Part 1 | Rachel Parsons, Vaxxter.com

Faith, Trust, or Science – The COVID Vaccine, Part 2 | Rachel Parsons, Vaxxter.com

Learn about the ingredients and intentions:

Coronavirus Pt. 6: The COVID Vaccines – part 1 – UPDATED 2-27-2021 | Dr. Sherrie Tenpenny, Vaxxter.com

Coronavirus Pt. 6: The COVID Vaccines – part 2 – UPDATED | Dr. Sherrie Tenpenny, Vaxxter.com

Dr. Sherri Tenpenny’s Interview Blowing the Lid off the COVID-19 Pandemic Scare, with Faulty Tests, Faulty Data, and Dangers of Vaccines Has Been Removed by Youtube

Report 199: Dr. Judy Mikovits: Corruption in Science, “Plandemic” Crimes, Grave Dangers of Vaccines

VAERS Data:

Latest Release of VAERS Data from National Vaccine Information Center website

NVIC’s Medalerts.org website which helps you run your own searches on VAERS Data

The OpenVAERS Project website, which also helps you run your own searches and posts summaries

UPDATED 26th March – How many people are the vaccines killing? | Dr. Vernon Coleman

Report 194: Dr. Andy Kauffmann: The Virus, The Test, The Vaccine–What People Should Really Know

NewsBreak 105 | Jan 15, 2021 | Frances Leader on UK MHRA Info: COVID Vaccine Uses Computer-Generated Codes, No Virus

“Herd Immunity”? A dishonest marketing gimmick | JB Handley, Children’s Health Defense June 21, 2018

68-Year-Old Dies After Anaphylactic Reaction to COVID Vaccine as CDC Continues to Ignore Inquiry Into Increasing Number of Deaths | Megan Redshaw, Children’s Health Defense, March 26, 2021

Health Impact News, March 28, 2021 | North Carolina College Professor DEAD After Johnson and Johnson COVID Shot

Health Impact News, March 28, 2021 | Entire City in Shock as Another Italian Professor is DEAD Following the AstraZeneca COVID Injection

Health Impact News, March 18, 2021 | 534 Dead 330,063 Reported Injured following COVID19 Experimental Vaccine Injections in the U.K.

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Three

Report | Seth Farber, Ph. D | Jan 6, 2021

Contd. from Part Two: Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Two

Anatomy of an Epidemic

Those familiar with this website or Robert Whitaker’s books know that he has been arguing for years that it is the psychiatric drugs that have created the epidemic of mental illnesses–that have transformed acute illnesses or life crises into chronic mental and physical illnesses. Whitaker writes, “The number of disabled mentally ill has risen dramatically since 1955, and ring the past two decades [1990-2010], a period when the prescribing of psychiatric medications has exploded, the number of adults and children disabled by mental illness has risen at a mind-boggling rate. Thus, we arrive at an obvious question, even though it is heretical in kind: Could our drug-based paradigm of care, in some unforeseen way, be fueling this modern-day plague?” (Whitaker, 2011, p.9) The question is rhetorical–the book indeed shows how this has occurred–the drugs themselves are neurotoxins that create symptoms labeled as mental illnesses. For example, while psychosis is usually an “episodic disorder,” anti-psychotic drugs create a state of chronic disability.

This is a very similar argument to the one the medical critics make about vaccines. Dr. Cowan puts it concisely: The “mistreatment of acute disease [through vaccination] is a mechanism for chronic disease”(p 21). Robert Kennedy Jr.– son of the late Senator Robert Kennedy, the American hero and martyr– is a lawyer and public spokesperson for the medical safety movement. As an environmental lawyer he was used to reading scientific studies when he first began to investigate vaccines. He has read the scientists and the medical critics and he eloquently argues that vaccines as they exist today have created an epidemic of chronic illnesses. He is expressing the argument made by virtually all of the medical critics of vaccines. The analogy with Whitaker’s argument about psychiatric drugs is striking.

Kennedy states repeatedly that he is not an “anti-vaxxer” – rather he is calling to us to listen to the science. Kennedy does not claim to know whether a safe vaccine can be manufactured. He wants us to realize that due to economic and political factors there is no incentive for Big Pharma to even try to manufacture safe vaccines–thus, vaccines are not even safety tested before they are put on the market and mandated for children. For almost every disease for which Big Pharma has a vaccine, CDC issues a government mandate even when it is for a disease that there is virtually no chance the child will contract. In other words the motive for the vaccine mandates is the growth of Big Pharma, not the health of the child.

Kennedy points out that “the pharmaceutical industry– the 4 large companies that make all the childhood vaccines – make 50 billion dollars a year selling our kids these 72 injections” but “they make $500 billion a year selling all the meds targeted to treat the vaccine side effects of the diseases they cause, the diseases listed on the inserts of the vaccines.” Big Pharma has created life-time clients. Kennedy called this “the business plan of Big Pharma” and described it as “the most criminal scheme we have ever seen in human history.” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/video/rfk-jr-rallies-health-freedom-advocates-in-colorado/)/

DR. SETH FARBER | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State

If you were born prior to 1989, your chance of having a chronic disease, according to HHS (Health and Human Services) is 12.8%. If you are born after 1989, your chance of having a chronic disease is 54%. And what are these diseases? They’re the neuro-developmental diseases, ADD, ADHD, language delays, speech delays, tics, Tourette Syndrome, ASD, and autism. The auto-immune disorders, Guillanne-Barre, multiple sclerosis, juvenile diabetes, and rheumatoid arthritis. The anaphylactic diseases, food allergies, rhinitis, asthma, and eczema. All of these exploded in 1989. There are a lot of culprits. Many new things. We have cell-phones. We have ultra-sound. We have glyphosate. We have many other things. Our kids are swimming in a toxic soup.

We’re not saying all of those illnesses came from vaccines. But there is no intervention that is so exquisite and precisely timed as what happened when we went in 1989 and changed that vaccine schedule and raised the levels of aluminum and mercury, tripled and quintupled them. We went from the 3 vaccines that I had, to the 72 my kids had, and to the 75 that kids are going to get next year. And there are 273 new vaccines in the pipeline.”

One in every two (49.5%) 13-18 year olds have been diagnosed with at least one mental health disorder. One in every six American children (17%) has a developmental disability according to the CDC.One in every eight American children (14%) requires special educations services.

One in twelve American children has asthma (8.4%).

One in every 13 American children has at least one food allergy and two fifths of those with food allergies have a history of severe reactions including deadly peanut allergies.

One in 285 U.S. children will be diagnosed with cancer before their 20th birthday. Each year, an estimated 15,780 U.S. children and adolescents ages 0 to 19 will be diagnosed with cancer.

“The elementary grades are overwhelmed with children who have symptoms of neurological or immune-system damage,” Patti White, a school nurse, told the House Government Reform Committee in 1999. “Vaccines are supposed to be making us healthier; however, in twenty-five years of nursing I have never seen so many damaged, sick kids. Something very, very wrong is happening to our children.” https://childrenshealthdefense.org/what-we-do/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal/

DR. SETH FARBER | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State

The leading medical critics of the current vaccine schedule have all reached similar conclusions. Some of them use vaccines sparingly and others are against all vaccines. None of them are anti-science––although this is the common accusation, as we saw with The New York Times. Their critique is scientific and evidence–based but many of them have adapted a different scientific paradigm than the one embraced by the vaccine promoters.

The critics I have read all come to the same explanation for why the vaccinations have created an epidemic of chronic diseases. I want to look at 2 critics here— I have no expertise in medical science–my purpose here is merely to give a brief explanation by citing 2 practicing pediatricians, Thomas Cowan and Richard Moskowitz, well acquainted with the science, who believe that the vaccinations adversely affect the immune system, and have engendered an epidemic of chronic illness.

Both Cowan and Moskowitz believe that common childhood diseases (measles, chickenpox, mumps) play an important role (or did before we introduced vaccines to prevent them) in training and educating the immune systems. The vaccine is no substitute. Moskowitz writes, “[W]ithout the acute illness, there is no priming of the immune system as a whole, no significant improvements in the general health of the recipients, no reliable mechanism for expelling the invading virus or bacterium” (Moskowitz, 2017, p.14). Fever, rash, coughing, sneezing, etc. are signs the body is expelling the antigen, ridding itself of the infection. It is not the virus that makes us sick. Sickness is the effects of a robust healthy immune system eliminating, expelling the invader (Cowan, 2018 p.24).

In other words, the acute illness is what is experienced when the body is fighting back.

“The normal febrile illnesses of childhood, measles, mumps, chicken pox, rubella, are the formative experiences for normal maturation of the immune system” (Moskowitz, p.17). “A sick child with a fever is not having an emergency. She is going through a valuable learning process which if continually thwarted will undermine her sacred quest to build a strong body, mind and immune system for her strong journey ahead” (Cowan, p15).

Indeed, the evidence proves that those who get these childhood diseases are better fortified by nature to resist other diseases. Children who get through measles at the usual age (pp. 4-7) are less likely to get heart disease, arthritis, allergies, autoimmune diseases later in life (Cowan, p.98). They are 60% less likely to contract numerous forms of cancer if they had experienced 3 or 4 of common childhood diseases (Moskowitz, p. 12).

There are two immune systems in the body. The first is referred to as “the cell-mediated immune system” –its function is to respond to a foreign substance, such as a virus or toxin (like aluminum or mercury), that has invaded the body, by sending in white blood cells to eliminate infected cells. This response by cell mediated system involves “elimination,” ––and causes us to feel sick. Cowan writes that “we need a cell-mediated response to clear unwanted invaders from our bodies” (p.25). The second immune system is the humoral system which comprises extracellular fluid substances which attach to protein on the invaders and destroy them or mark them for destruction by other cells.

Moskowitz and Cowan both believe we should have more appreciation for the cell-mediated immune system. Vaccination attempts to by-pass it, but at what cost? “Modern pediatrics is an assault on the cell mediated immune system”(Cowan, p .27). Rather than allowing a child to experience chicken pox we inject her with an antigen–a piece of the virus. If the virus is dead (as it is in most vaccines), it will not elicit an antibody and must be linked to an adjuvant–which must be an irritant, a toxin. “This is the blueprint for all modern vaccines: Isolate an antigenic piece of a virus, combine it with a toxin, and hope for a lifelong antibody response” (Cowan, p.27). But how will the body clear the toxin? It will not. According to both Cowan and Moskowitz, the cell-mediated response is the only way to clear these toxins from our tissues.

Moskowitz and Cowan–and doubtless countless others whom I have not read– identify several problems with vaccinations: 1) The atrophy of the cellular immunity system undermines the ability of the organism to respond to challenges, 2) The humoral immune system is unable to eliminate the antigen from the body– thus it leads to chronic diseases 3) The overstimulation of the humoral system through numerous vaccinations establishes a pattern of overreacting and thus leads to autoimmune disease.

Moskowitz quotes Dr Howard Buttram, who writes that the humoral system is placed by the vaccine program into “a dominant position for which it is physiologically unsuited, while cellular immunity lacking the challenges of the minor childhood diseases [measles, mumps, chickenpox] of former times may undergo progressive atrophy from disuse”(p.16). This is exactly what has happened, and it will get worse because many more vaccines are in the pipeline and public health officials–with the support of the government and the press–and Bill Gates–plan to cajole or force adults to start taking vaccines regularly.

As one astute holistic health practitioner observed, “Through a persistent pervasive hypnosis from pediatricians, news outlets, print ads, web content, governmental press, TV programs and magazines parents are being taught it is normal to have a child who can’t talk, poop, walk, eat, digest food, grow, attend school or perhaps even breathe without the benefit of a litany of medications and vaccines. Worse we are taught that children who don’t join in are somehow not normal…”(Converse, 2012, p.127). And now post-COVID-19 adults will be subjected to the same propaganda to persuade us we need their vaccines to function–and if persuasion doesn’t work they intend to issue mandates and to restrict us if we don’t do as mandated. Our immune systems will be destroyed courtesy of the medical establishment and our public health officials.

Without the cell-mediated response produced by the body itself — the acute illness—there is no way to detoxify, “no reliable mechanism for expelling the invading virus or bacterium.” (Moskowitz, 2017, p. 14). Stephen Marini aptly notes that as a result of vaccinations, “[t]he body is essentially constipated with viruses that it cannot expel!” But to suppress this natural response “can be as hazardous to our health as suppressing waste elimination from the bowel or toxin release from the skin. ” http://pathwaystofamilywellness.org/Informed-Choice/how-do-vaccines-work-immune-mechanisms-and-consequences.html

Vaccination, Moskowitz points out enables the virus, the antigen, to accomplish the very thing the whole immune mechanism was designed to prevent– it grants “bacteria, viruses and other foreign antigens free and immediate access to the bone marrow, spleen, liver, intestines, thymus, blood, and lymph nodes with no reliable means of getting rid of them” Vaccines “drive the invading organism deeper in to the interior of our bodies” where they remain permanently, chronically infecting the organs where they reside (Moskowitz, 2017, p.16). According to Marini, vaccines can exhaust the immune system by forcing the body to deal with a chronic ongoing infection. (http://pathwaystofamilywellness.org/Informed-Choice/how-do-vaccines-work-immune-mechanisms-and-consequences.html)

Moskowitz says that live viruses can remain latent for years within the host cells without ever provoking acute disease: “In most cases, viruses achieve this by attaching their own genetic material as an extra particle or “episome” to that of the host cell and reproducing along with it. The body will continue to make antibodies but “with the virus permanently integrated into the genetic material of the host cell, these antibodies will now have to be directed against the cell itself” (Moskowitz, 2006, p.8). This results in autoimmune diseases since attacking and destroying the infected cell and the body’s own tissue is now the only way the “antigenic challenge” can be removed from the body. This is one mechanism leading to autoimmunity.

Cowan says autoimmunity is a result of an over-stimulated humoral response (p28). With millions of people suffering from autoimmune disease “at a number unheard of before the introduction of a mass vaccination program” how can this connection be dismissed? (p.28). Researchers in Japan vaccinated animals according to the current vaccine schedule and concluded “autoimmunity appears to be the inevitable consequence of over-stimulating the host’s immune system by repeated immunization” (p.28).

DR. SETH FARBER | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State

The argument made by Cowan and Moskowitz is the same made by other doctors like them–almost all of whom vaccinated children without much thought in the beginning of their practice as pediatricians and over the years became increasingly critical of vaccines. Unlike the experts at CDC and FDA who felt, as the FDA official put it, that “any possible doubts, whether or not well founded, about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist in view of the need to assure that the vaccine will continue to be used to the maximum extent …” these doctors felt it was their responsibility to put their patients first– above their own financial gain– to honor the Hippocratic oath, and to sound the alarm to their fellow citizens, even at the cost of being demonized by the press.What is remarkable is not only that there are so many of us….but also that our arguments..all sound so much alike” because they arise not from theory, “but from our shared cumulative and hard-won experience in the trenches of everyday medical practice” (Moskowitz, 2017, p.47).

Dr. Larry Palevsky speaks for these doctors: “It’s heart-breaking to see kids who were speaking, doing well, and were developmentally normal, who lost their voice, made no eye contact, developed seizures, asthma, and allergies, and had nowhere to go because the doctor said it was a coincidence. The studies that deny any correlation between vaccination and autism don’t meet scientific standards” (Moskowitz, 2017, p.49).

Dr. Cowan concludes that vaccines have not succeeded, “Our communities, hospitals and schools are filled to the brim with sick and injured children” (Cowan, 2018, p.71). “We are..dealing with something frightening and threatening: a massive epidemic of chronically ill children and a medical establishment that is not only enabling the situation but profiting from it” (p. 6). And he reached the same conclusion that a vocal minority of doctors, but probably the most well-informed, have reached:“My understanding after years of studying the science behind vaccines, is that a truly safe and effective vaccine has not yet been discovered” (p.70).

The Therapeutic State

COVID-1984 has changed the landscape of America and served as a pretext to create a global digital panopticon, a system of total surveillance, domination and control. Like mental patients we may all soon be forced by the State to take poisonous drugs (i.e., vaccines). The authorities may not come and forcibly plunge the needle into our arm—although that is happening in New Zealand– but those who refuse may be prevented from going to work or school or traveling–there seems to be no end to what the supporters of a corporate bio-security surveillance State would be ready to do.

The trend toward mandatory vaccination began before COVID-19 but it has accelerated. The seeds of totalitarianism lay within the mental health system– and it also lies within the public health bureaucracy and its paternalistic ideology. Thomas Szasz realized this as early as 1960. (https://www.lewrockwell.com/2010/02/thomas-szasz/fifty-years-after-themythofmentalillness/). The public health treats ordinary citizens with the same kind of condescension mental health professionals display towards mental patients. I discussed above the CDC mandates and vaccine schedule. Up until recently every state has always allowed exemptions for religious and medical reasons. During the last 5 years, California, Vermont, New York, Maine and Hawaii have outlawed these religious exemptions. (https://www.nvic.org/NVIC-Vaccine-News/March-2020/the-national-plan-to-vaccinate-every-american.aspx) West Virginia and Mississippi do not permit them. (https://www.nvic.org/faqs/vaccine-exemptions.aspx)

Even medical exemptions are being so severely restricted they are virtually meaningless and expose the most vulnerable children to great harm. According to Mary Holland, chief counsel and vice-chairman of CHD, in New York, for example there are now emergency guidelines that the Department of Health publicized on December 31, 2019. Those guidelines say the only basis for a medical exemption is if children have anaphylaxis, i.e., they can’t breathe and they nearly die, or they have a documented brain injury. Even in those cases, Holland points out, that would be an exemption only for that specific vaccine. In other words, to get an exemption the child must have already had a medical crisis in response to that one vaccine. Medical exemptions by treating physicians in New York are now reviewed by the Department of Health bureaucrat who can overrule the child’s doctor without even examining the child. For example, he can say, “No, I disagree with the neurologist who says that this child is at risk of brain injury from the next vaccine. I deny the child’s exemption.” There are hundreds of children whose exemptions have been thus overruled (Fitts, pp.5-6, https://home.solari.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/sr20200225_Special_Holland_Vaccine.pdf)

According to Barbara Loe Fisher,,“The government has a National Vaccine Plan. It is a Plan designed to make sure you, your child and everyone in America gets every dose of every vaccine that government officials recommend now and in the future… [F]ederal health officials accurately characterize the U.S. vaccination system in the 21st century as a business. A decade ago they admitted that ‘The 2010 National Vaccine Plan provides a vision for the U.S. vaccine and immunization enterprise for the next decade. That’s because they know the National Vaccine Plan is really a Vaccine Marketing Plan for the pharmaceutical industry.” The Plan is described on HHS website https://www.nvic.org/NVIC-Vaccine-News/March-2020/the-national-plan-to-vaccinate-every-american.aspx ((https://www.hhs.gov/vaccines/national-vaccine-plan/index.htm). According to Fisher, the Plan is the reason why the states are trying to eliminate exemptions and mandates every vaccine the pharmaceutical industry produces and the CDC recommends. (https://www.nvic.org/NVIC-Vaccine-News/March-2020/the-national-plan-to-vaccinate-every-american.aspx)

Recently Massachusetts passed a law mandating all students ages 6 months and older receive the flu vaccine this year–2020. Although other states require flu shots for very young children, Massachusetts is the first state to also require influenza vaccinations for all students attending kindergarten, primary and secondary schools and colleges and universities. (https://thevaccinereaction.org/2020/08/massachusetts-public-health-officials-require-annual-flu-shots-for-child-care-and-all-grades-through-college)

It would take another paper to discuss the variety of “conspiracy theories” that have been propounded to explain the origins of the COVID-19 epidemic and more importantly the response to it. Whether it was deliberately released and manmade or natural, many people believe the response is incommensurate with the problem posed by COVID-19 and that furthermore the response has been and will be to the advantage of the very wealthy. Is the virus a pretext to implement another agenda?

But even if COVID-19 was a natural virus it is still obvious that there has been a concerted effort to profit from it. Naomi Klein’s book on the “shock doctrine” explains how vested interests respond to a crisis (2008). As Klein put it to an interviewer: The “shock doctrine” is the political strategy of using large-scale crises to push through policies that systematically deepen inequality, enrich elites, and undercut everyone else… Political and economic elites understand that moments of crisis is their chance to push through their wish list of unpopular policies that further polarize wealth in this country and around the world.” (https://www.vice.com/en_us/article/5dmqyk/naomi-klein-interview-on-coronavirus-and-disaster-capitalism-shock-doctrine)

But it’s not only economic policies, as we ought to know from 9/11.

Kennedy wrote, “Are powerful state and corporate entities using the current crisis to remove basic rights and intensify pressures to promote vaccines and surveillance? Does anyone else feel the suffocating darkness of tyranny descending on our nation? And finally, does anyone share my dread that #BillGates — and his Mini-Me, Tony #Fauci — will somehow be running our Brave New World?” (https://www.instagram.com/p/B_3IQlYFXgJ)

As I write in August, 2020, every day there is something alarming in the press. There is a new bill– New York State bill A99– which is now under consideration in the NY State legislature. It allows the state to take an individual “suspected” of being infected or contaminated to a detention center to keep her there, and compel her to receive any medical treatment deemed necessary – including forced vaccination. This bill could become the model for other similar bills to be passed into law in other states. Virginia and Massachusetts are already indicating they intend to pass mandatory vaccinations. In New York, there are low key programs to set up Covid checkpoints stopping and checking vehicles coming into the state. What is terrifying is the assault on the rights that have for centuries been considered fundamental to our identity as Americans. (https://www.lewrockwell.com/2020/08/no_author/764696-2)

But it is even more disturbing when we look at Australia or New Zealand.“Right now, Australia and New Zealand are slamming citizens with perhaps the most draconian measures yet in the Western world. These are policies that the elites want to introduce everywhere, but they are going full bore in Australia, and it just keeps getting worse” (https://www.technocracy.news/resource-grab-the-trilateral-commission-has-always-called-for-the-destruction-of-national-sovereignty)

At an August 19th press conference, Australia’s second most senior medical officer said the government would be “discussing measures such as banning restaurants, international travel, public transport, and withholding government programs through ‘No Jab No Pay’ in order to coerce vaccine resisters.” (https://ellenbrown.com/2020/08/22/from-lockdown-to-police-state-the-great-reset-rolls-out).

In Australia, residents are not allowed to travel more than 3 miles from their homes. Citizens violating these rules are subject to $10,000 fines or arrest. In New Zealand, quarantine camps are now under the control of the military, and all citizens who are suspected to have Covid can be separated from their families and placed in the camps, which are hotels converted into prisons. The pretext– a mere 525 deaths in Australia and 22 deaths in New Zealand. (https://www.technocracy.news/resource-grab-the-trilateral-commission-has-always-called-for-the-destruction-of-national-sovereignty/)

Is this a precursor for America? Covid camps? “Mainstream media outlets have been suggesting this strategy for months. The Washington Post applauded the use of forced isolation camps in other nations and asks why the US has not yet used them beyond ports for foreign travelers?” (https://www.technocracy.news/resource-grab-the-trilateral-commission-has-always-called-for-the-destruction-of-national-sovereignty)

Bill Gates, vaccine evangelist and now the largest funder of WHO–since the US stopped the funding— has been pushing for digital tracking. “Eventually we will have some digital certificates to show who has recovered or been tested recently or when we have a vaccine who has received it,” said Gates. (https://finance.yahoo.com/news/covid-19-immunity-passport-unites-140503280.html).

Gates is working with a number of organizations to create these digital certificates–one of the technologies being developed is a “quantum dot” tattoo, delivered through vaccination, stored under the skin and read by smartphones. The certificates would include a person’s medical records (including vaccination status), as well as financial information and identification. Such technology could be used to prevent those who choose not to vaccinate from participating in many aspects of society, including travel, work and school.. Germany has already implemented “immunity certificates,” (https://www.westonaprice.org/health-topics/covid-19-pursuing-truth-to-protect-our-liberties/)

Kennedy said in a recent speech, “Big Pharma is capturing politicians, running governments, in every nation on the globe. Today we have inflections of new technologies which gives them power to impose controls that never existed before in history, unimaginable controls on human beings no tyrant in history ever had… Digitalized currency–they will be able to enforce obedience. If you’re disobedient they will shut down your bank account and starve you…Government agencies orchestrating obedience –that is not the product of democracy. It is the product of a pharmaceutical-driven biosecurity agenda that will enslave the entire human race and plunge us into a dystopian nightmare where the apocalyptic forces of greed and ignorance will be running our lives and destroying the dreams we hope to give to our children.” https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/robert-f-kennedy-jr-holds-a-press-conference-in-berlin-after-launching-chds-europe-chapter

In America the Therapeutic State that Thomas Szasz has warned us about is coming into existence. But Szasz’s term sounds benign—it is a bio-fascist State. But it is not through psychiatry that it is extending its reach over every American– it is through the “public health” bureaucracy which works in tandem with Big Pharma. As a Libertarian, Szasz did not realize that this is an alliance between the State and private enterprise. It is not the State alone. It is neither socialism nor democracy. As indicated above: due to the passage of the National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act in 1986, as far as vaccines go, this industry is not accountable to the American people. The agencies which are supposed to regulate it, instead promote its products and protect it from exposure. The corrupt medical establishment gives it a facade of scientific legitimacy although its products do great harm to millions of Americans. It could produce vaccines which would kill millions of people and it would still not be held accountable.

But decades ago, Szasz had intuitively grasped the perils of the public health ideology. He reminded us the Nazi genocidal eugenics program was not based on racial hatred, although it included it. It was based on a utopian vision of a harmonious world order—and the subordination of the individual to the greater good of the public. Historian Robert Proctor wrote that Nazism is “a vast hygienic experiment designed to bring about an exclusionist sanitary utopia”(p.505).

It was “medical puritanism,” Szasz contends, that motivated the Nazis “to wage therapeutic wars against cancer and Jews.” The Therapeutic State today is also based on a medical program– ostensibly to protect citizens from viruses. This enables Big Pharma to make money, the Vaccine program to grow and the technocrats to invade every person’s body, to take over their lives. It covers all aspects of human existence. Szasz wrote, ”The therapeutic state thus swallows up everything human on the seemingly rational ground that nothing falls outside the province of health and medicine, just as the theological state had swallowed up everything human on the..ground that nothing falls outside the province of God” (p.515).

. “Once we begin to worship health as an all-pervasive good—a moral value that trumps all others, especially liberty—it becomes sanctified as a kind of secular holiness” (p.505-6). This profound insight of Szasz’s explains the fervor of the believers in the vaccine religion, their intolerance of “anti-vaxxers”–and it explains why they are so intent upon silencing the heretics, the“anti-vaxxers.” ( “Anathema on them.”) And also, because they don’t want to be accused and thus reminded of their crimes– because they have guilty consciences knowing they are complicit with harming millions of their fellow citizens, mostly children.

The fear of a virus has proven to be a greater instrument for inducing conformity and submission to authority than the fear of terrorism. The American health ideology, Szasz says, rests on the premise that “the individual is incompetent to protect himself from himself and needs the protection of the paternalistic state”(p.505). To protect himself from himself, the virus is a worse threat than the terrorist. The citizen needs the state, she needs Big Brother. But little does she know—the vaccine is poison. In the name of protecting citizens, the paternalistic State, the bio-fascist state, is poisoning them.

Many Americans would be willing to allow the Therapeutic State to destroy the constitutional rights that have been at the center of our national identity since the founding of the republic. But it is in the name of the republic, in the name of democracy, that American citizens must now rise up and declare that our bodies are not the property of the state, that our children are not the property of the State, that we are citizens, not slaves, not children, not “mental patients,” not targeted individuals (TIs) –we must re- affirm our national identity based upon the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution and carry out a 2nd American revolution.

As Robert Kennedy Jr. said, “We are not going to let you take our democracy away. We are not going to let you take our health away. We are not going to let you take our children away. We are not going to let you take our freedom away.”


This concludes Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State by Dr. Seth Farber

Part One: Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part One

Part Two: Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Two

The other references are in the article. I listed Blaylock here because his article is on multiple sites.

REFERENCES

Blaylock, R. (2008), “Vaccines, Neurodevelopment and Autism Spectrum Disorders: The Danger of Excessive Vaccination During Brain Development:The Case for a Link to Autism Spectrum Disorders” www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Bruesewitz, R. (2012), “Justice Disserved: The Hannah Bruesewitz Odyssey” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Children’s Health Defense (2018), Conflicts of Interest Undermine Children’s Health, ebook, Children Health Defense.

Colbin, Annemarie (2012), “A Holistic Health Perspective,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Converse, Judy, (2012), “Sick is the New Healthy,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY:Skyhorse Publishing.

Cowan, Thomas (2018), Vaccines, Autoimmunity and the Changing Nature of Childhood Illness, White River Junction Vt: Chelsea Green Publishing.

Fisher, Barbara Loe (2008), Vaccines, Autism & Chronic Inflammation: The New Epidemic Worthington, Ohio: P.B.Industries.

Fitts, Catherine Austin ( 2020), ”Special Solari Report: Vaccine Mandates with Mary Holland, J.D.” https://home.solari.com/special-solari-report-vaccine-mandates-with-mary-holland-j-d, February 25, 2020

Handley,J. B.(2018), How to End the Autism Epidemic,White River Junction, Vt:: Chelsea Green Publishing

Holland, Mary (2010), “Reconsidering Compulsory Childhood Vaccination,” Public Law Research Paper,No. 10-64, NY:New York University School of Law.

Humphries, Suzanne and Roman Bystrianyk, (2013), Dissolving Illusions:Disease, Vaccines, and The Forgotten History, New York, CreateSpace Publishers (https://www.amazon.com/Dissolving-Illusions-Disease-Vaccines-Forgotten-dp-1480216895/dp/1480216895/ref=mt_other?_encoding=UTF8&me=&qid=1600662412).

Klein, Naomi (2008), The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism, New York: Picador.

Moskowitz, Richard (2006), “How Do Vaccines Work,” Pathways to Family Wellness, Issue 10, June-July 2006.

Moskowitz, Richard (2009) “On Anti-vaxxers,” Age of Autism, Jan, 2019. https://www.ageofautism.com/2019/01/dr-richard-moskowitz-md-on-anti-vaxxers.html

Moskowitz, Richard (2017), Vaccines: A Reappaisal, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Proctor, Robert. (1999) The Nazi War on Cancer. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press..

Stoller,K.P. (2019), “The Denial of Adverse Event Risk Following Immunization and the Loss of Informed Consent – A Perspective, ” ACTA SCIENTIFIC PAEDIATRICS, Vol. 2 Issue 1 January 2019

Szasz, Thomas (2001),The Therapeutic State:The Tyranny of Pharmacracy, Volume V, Number 4, Spring 2001,Independent Review.

Wilcox, Brent (2018), Jabbed: How the Vaccine Industry, Medical Establishment, and Government Stick It to You and Your Family, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Whitaker, Robert (2011), Anatomy of an Epidemic: Magic Bullets, Psychiatric Drugs, and the Astonishing Rise of Mental Illness in America, New York: Broadway Books.

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part Two

Report | Seth Farber, Ph. D | Dec 30, 2020

Contd. from Part One: Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part One


Doubts Cannot be Allowed to Exist

CDC will tell you that vaccines don’t cause autism. (https://www.cdc.gov/vaccinesafety/concerns/autism/cdc2004pediatrics.html) Vaccines are safe and effective. What they don’t tell you is no vaccine has ever been tested for safety or efficacy— unlike all other drugs. It is the only medical product which is not required by law to be tested with a control group taking an inert placebo. No vaccine has ever been compared to an inert placebo–which is the routine way of testing all other drugs. No vaccine has been safety tested for more than days or weeks, but autoimmune diseases and cancer can take months or years to develop. The crazy thing is that no test is done to determine if the vaccine is effective. There is only one criterion for CDC–does the vaccine produce antibodies? If it does, the FDA approves it and CDC puts it on schedule.

(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/protecting-our-future/facts-you-can-use/10-facts-every-parent-needs-to-know-about-vaccinations )

It is no accident that you are not told all the facts. It is the policy of government agencies to keep you in the dark. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) stated their policy on this issue clearly: “any possible doubts, whether or not well founded, about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist in view of the need to assure that the vaccine will continue to be used to the maximum extent consistent with the nation’s public health objectives”(Stoller, 2019.p.21) The agencies that are supposed to protect children from the consequences of corporate greed are working in tandem with Big Pharma and their goal is not to protect the health of Americans but to expand the program—at the expense of our health.

Any possible doubts about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist”–that is the credo of the government and the mainstream media. It explains why critics of the vaccine program are ridiculed and vilified, if not demonized, as conspiracy nuts, and anti-scientific “anti-vaxxers.”

The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) stated their policy on this issue clearly: “any possible doubts, whether or not well founded, about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist in view of the need to assure that the vaccine will continue to be used to the maximum extent consistent with the nation’s public health objectives”(Stoller, 2019.p.21)

Any possible doubts about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist”–that is the credo of the government and the mainstream media. It explains why critics of the vaccine program are ridiculed and vilified, if not demonized, as conspiracy nuts, and anti-scientific “anti-vaxxers.”

DR. SETH FARBER | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State

HHS has a National Vaccine Plan. Barbara Loe Fisher aptly commented that “the National Vaccine Plan is really a Vaccine Marketing Plan for the pharmaceutical industry.” https://www.nvic.org/NVIC-Vaccine-News/March-2020/the-national-plan-to-vaccinate-every-american.aspx described in 2010 its plan for our future.  The Plan is described in HHS literature beginning in 2010: “Coverage rates[of vaccinations] across the lifespan will increase, lowering outbreaks of VPDs [vaccine-preventable diseases] and decreasing geographic pockets of low coverage. Provider and public confidence in both vaccines and the entities involved in licensing, recommending, and monitoring vaccine safety will increase while the worry, concerns, and anxiety regarding vaccines, particularly with respect to safety, will decrease. Providers, parents, and the public will also support vaccines as an important and necessary part of our nation’s health system.” (https://www.hhs.gov/sites/default/files/nvpo-midcourse-review-final.pdf,p25)

To paraphrase the above: The public will realize that vaccines are safe and effective, even if they aren’t–they will have confidence both in vaccines and in government agencies which are pushing these vaccines, like CDC. The booklet leaves out one sentence: “Big Brother loves you.”

So, in HHS’s ideal scenario “worry, concerns, and anxiety regarding vaccines, particularly with respect to safety, will decrease.” But from a humanitarian perspective if the vaccine is not safe it is not desirable that concern should decrease. The FDA stated that it is determined that the vaccine “will continue to be used to the maximum extent”–as long as this is consistent with public health objectives. But what happens when it isn’t? That possibility is not even considered by HHS––which speaks volumes. Parents” concern is for the health of their children, whether or not vaccines will continue to be used to the maximum extent.

The documents I quoted are not anomalies. In June 2000 a now famous meeting took place at Simpsonwood Conference Center in Georgia. The meeting included about 60 vaccine program high-level officials from the CDC and the Food and Drug Administration, the top vaccine specialist from the World Health Organization, and representatives of every major vaccine manufacturer.

Simpsonwood Conference Center and Retreat, Norcross, Georgia

The discussions at this meeting demonstrate that the policymakers have internalized the FDA credo that doubts about safety cannot be allowed to exist. Kennedy wrote a seminal article in 2005 (published in both Salon and Rolling Stone) that helped to publicize the meeting, aptly titled Deadly Immunity. It was in fact after Kennedy read the Simpsonwood transcript that he became convinced that there is a link between vaccines and autism.

In the article Kennedy wrote, “I devoted time to study this issue because I believe that this is a moral crisis that must be addressed. If, as the evidence suggests, our public-health authorities knowingly allowed the pharmaceutical industry to poison an entire generation of American children, their actions arguably constitute one of the biggest scandals in the annals of American medicine.” https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal-2/Since Kennedy wrote those words further evidence has been revealed that heightens the CDC’s culpability–and that of the press for helping to cover this up to this day.

Kennedy noted more recently: “All of the barriers that are meant to protect our children: the government, the lawyers, the regulatory agencies and the press – the checks and balances in our democratic system that are supposed to stand between corporate power and our little children have been removed… “https://ahrp.org/why-is-the-cdc-petrified-of-the-film-vaxxed/

The purpose of the Simpsonwood meeting was to discuss a new study by CDC epidemiologist, Tom Verstraeten– based on a CDC database containing the medical records of 100,000 children– that made it clear that there was a link between a mercury-based preservative in the vaccines (thimerosal) and a dramatic increase in autism and numerous other neurological disorders.

“I was actually stunned by what I saw,” Verstraeten told those assembled at Simpsonwood, citing not only his data but the large number of earlier studies that indicate a link between thimerosal and speech delays, attention-deficit disorder, hyperactivity and autism. Since 1991 when CDC and the FDA had recommended that three additional vaccines laced with the preservative thimerosal be given to extremely young infants —in one case, within hours of birth– the estimated number of cases of autism had increased fifteenfold, from one in every 2,500 children to one in 166 children in 2005 when Kennedy was writing.

(It is several times higher today than in 2000, when the Simpsonwood meeting took place; even though thimerosal has been eliminated, children are being given higher amounts of other toxins, such as aluminum.)

Of course, Verstraeten was stunned, but he ought not to have been surprised. At the time of the Simpsonwood meeting, at the age of two months, infants routinely received three inoculations that contained a total of 62.5 micrograms of ethylmercury — a level 99 times greater than the EPA’s limit for daily exposure to methylmercury, a related neurotoxin.

(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal-2/ )

On the second day of the meeting an interesting event occurred. The meeting chairman, Dr. Richard Johnston, a pediatrician, was called out for an emergency call. When he returned he shared: “[M]y daughter-in law delivered a son.. Our first male in the line of the next generation and I do not want that grandson to get a thimerosal containing vaccine…I want that grandson to only be given thimerosal-free vaccines” (Wilcox, 2018, p159.)

This sounds like an impassioned argument to ban vaccines with thimerosal and he did argue that “it was desirable to remove thimerosal from US vaccines,” but he had no objection to hiding the revelations from the public, and saw no need to remove thimerosal from vaccines exported to “developing countries” (Ibid, p.160).

Verstraeten’s findings were alarming to all the discussants but “instead of taking immediate steps to alert the public and rid the vaccine supply of thimerosal, the officials and executives at Simpsonwood spent most of the next two days discussing how to cover up the damaging data,” Kennedy wrote. (Deadly Immunity – Government Cover-up of a Mercury/Autism Scandal • Children’s Health Defense).

Dr. John Clements, who represented the WHO at the EIS conference, expressed alarm about the direction of the research, which he viewed as a threat to the vaccination program. He warned that the information should not be allowed to reach the public, and he bluntly stated the study should not have been done “because the outcome could have… been predicted.” In other words, he knew all along that the vaccines were harmful, but “doubts about the safety cannot be allowed to exist”:

“And I really [don’t] want to risk offending everyone in the room by saying that perhaps this study should not have been done at all, because the outcome of it could have, to some extent, been predicted…, and we have all reached this point now where we are left hanging, …I know how we handle it from here is extremely problematic.” — Dr. John Clements, World Health Organization

“[T]hrough the freedom of information that will be taken by others and will be used in ways beyond the control of this group. And I am very concerned about that as I suspect it is already too late to do anything regardless of any professional body and what they say.”

“I am very concerned that this has gotten this far, and that having got this far, how you present in a concerted voice the information to the ACIP [Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices] in a way they will be able to handle it and not get exposed to the traps which are out there in public relations.

“My mandate as I sit here in this group is to make sure at the end of the day that 100,000,000 are immunized with DTP, Hepatitis B and if possible Hib, this year, next year and for many years to come, and that will have to be with Thimerosal-containing vaccines unless a miracle occurs and an alternative is found quickly and is tried and found to be safe.” In other words, it did not matter to Clements how harmful the vaccines were—as long as`100 million kids were immunized (and the vaccines were sold).

Quoted in Vera Sharav, “The Vaccine Program: Betrayal of Public Trust & Institutional Corruption. Part 1 of 7.” JANUARY 22, 2018

“The Vaccine Program: Betrayal of Public Trust & Institutional Corruption. Part 1 of 7.”

Dr Robert Chen:

“The issue is that it is impossible, unethical to leave kids unvaccinated..” (Wilcox,2018, p160)

The fear was that if the information got out many people would be less likely to vaccinate at all.

Other comments from those present include: “We could exclude the lowest exposure children from the database”; “We could remove children that got the highest exposure levels since they represented an unusually high percentage of the [adverse] outcomes”; “We can push and pull this data any way we want to get the results we want;” “We could have predicted the outcomes.”

A discussion ensued about how to hide and manipulate the data to conceal the link between mercury and autism. CDC’s Roger Bernier reminded everyone to : “consider this embargoed information…and very highly protected information.” There was a consensus that— to quote the FDA– “any possible doubts, whether or not well founded, about the safety of the vaccine cannot be allowed to exist in view of the need to assure that the vaccine will continue to be used to the maximum extent …”(Stoller, 2019, p.21) The qualifying phrase “consistent with the nation’s public health objectives” was obviously not a factor.

Kennedy noted, “the government has proved to be far more adept at handling” the damaging data than at protecting children’s health. “https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal-2/

The CDC and FDA went to work to cover up the evidence. The CDC withheld Verstraeten’s findings, even though they had been scheduled for immediate publication, and they told other scientists that his original data had been “lost” and could not be reconstructed. And to thwart the danger of Freedom of Information Act lawsuits, CDC gave its large database of vaccine records to a private company, thus preventing researchers from seeing it.

Dr. Seth Farber | Big Pharma, mandatory vaccinations, and the emerging bio-fascist state

(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal-2/ )

After the Simpsonwood meeting William Egan of the FDA fulfilled his appointed task and told a Congressional hearing, “The FDA considers all vaccines to be safe and effective. It is essential that all children receive all vaccines according to the currently recommended schedule” (Wilcox, 2018, p.164).

But while maintaining mercury was safe, the FDA decided to use another “preservative” in place of Thimerosal – evidently since they feared that the vaccine program would attract negative publicity. (This was years before the media took its vow of silence.)

The CDC allowed the drug companies to sell off their stock of mercury-based vaccines until 2004, they bought up the remaining vaccines from Big Pharma to export to developing countries (evidently poisoning poor children was not a problem) and allowed the companies to continue using the preservative in some American vaccines — including several pediatric flu shots as well as tetanus boosters routinely given to eleven-year-olds.

The uppermost concern of the officials entrusted with the safety of America’s children was to protect the reputation of the program— not to protect the children. Although they removed the mercury, they allowed Big Pharma to sell off their existing stocks of vaccines. Rep. Dan Burton’s House Government Reform Committee concluded in its final report. “This epidemic [autism] in all probability may have been prevented or curtailed had the FDA not been asleep at the switch regarding a lack of safety data regarding injected thimerosal, a known neurotoxin.” The FDA and other public-health agencies failed to act, the committee added, out of “institutional malfeasance for self protection” and “misplaced protectionism of the pharmaceutical industry.” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/deadly-immunity-government-cover-mercuryautism-scandal-2/)

But the public health technocrats were not alone. The mainstream media, fattened with revenue from drug industry ads, has helped to conceal the dangers of vaccines with The New York Times to this day describing (in an editorial) “anti-vaxxers” as “the enemy” and dishonestly assuring readers that science has proved vaccines are harmless, “Scientists, especially, are uncomfortable with black-and-white statements, because science is all about nuance. But, in the case of vaccines, there are some hard truths that deserve to be trumpeted. Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism. Full stop.”

There is a postscript to this incident. In 2013, Dr. William Thompson a head scientist found himself talking on the phone to Brian Hooker, a scientist and father of a vaccine-injured child. Overwhelmed with guilt Thompson made a confession to Hooker. Under orders of his supervisors in 2002, he had destroyed data from a CDC experiment which showed a link between vaccines and autism. Hooker was excited because he knew the study to which Thompson referred was one frequently used to demonstrate that vaccines do not cause autism. (https://ahrp.org/why-is-the-cdc-petrified-of-the-film-vaxxed/)

Thompson had wanted to reveal this in 2002 but he was threatened with the loss of his job and he kept quiet. But after talking to Hooker he could keep silent no longer. “When I talk to you, you have a son with autism, I have great shame now when I meet families with kids with autism because I have been part of the problem…[T]he CDC is so paralyzed now by anything related to autism….they’re afraid to look for things that might be associated [with autism]” (Wilcox,2018, p.172).

In 2014 CDC Thompson volunteered to testify to Congress but Congress refused to subpoena him. Thus, his revelations are known to only a few. Dr. William Thompson wrote that he wanted to talk to Congress: “I have waited a long time to tell my story and I want to tell it truthfully. I have been involved in deceiving millions of taxpayers regarding the potential negative side effects of vaccines. We lied about the scientific findings. The CDC can no longer be trusted to do vaccine safety work. Can’t be trusted to be transparent. The CDC can’t be trusted to police itself”. William E. Thompson, Ph.D, Senior Scientist, US Centers, circa 2014

Dr. seth Farber | Big pharma, mandatory vaccinations, and the emerging bio-fascist state

(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/wp-content/uploads/Ken-Stoller-Immunization-Informed_Consent.pdf)

The New York Times did not cover the story.

Vaccines are Not Toxic: The Vaccine Faith

In 2019, the World Health Organization (to which vaccine evangelist Bill Gates was the second largest donor, after the government of the US) declared vaccine hesitancy “the growing resistance to widely available lifesaving vaccines” (New York Times)–was one of the top ten health threats in the world, alongside air pollution, climate change, HIV. The editorial Board of The New York Times sprung into action, declaring that “anti-vaxxers” are “the enemy” and called on the U.S. government to “get tough” by waging a “bold and aggressive” pro-vaccine campaign that includes eliminating religious exemptions for vaccination and includes “tightening restrictions around how much leeway states can grant families that want to skip essential vaccines.” https://www.nvic.org/nvic-vaccine-news/january-2019/who,-pharma,-gates.aspx. In other words the paper long considered a bastion of liberalism takes a stand against informed consent, against our constitutional rights, and urges the state to force families to submit to “essential” vaccines.

The title of the editorial was, “How to Inoculate Against Anti-Vaxxers”

It states, “Yes, there are chemicals in vaccines, but they are not toxic”–either a dishonest or a delusional assertion, as a cursory glance at the ingredients reveals! They claim of course to speak in the name of science, “No, vaccines can’t overwhelm your immune system, which already confronts countless pathogens every day.” The Times told its readers, “It’s also O.K. to get out of the gray zone. Scientists, especially, are uncomfortable with black-and-white statements, because science is all about nuance. But, in the case of vaccines, there are some hard truths that deserve to be trumpeted. Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism. Full stop.” https://www.nytimes.com/2019/01/19/opinion/vaccines-public-health.html?action=click&module=Opinion&pgtype=Homepage Vaccines are not toxic.

That is a lie. If it is not a lie, it is an irresponsible and appalling statement for a paper esteemed for investigative journalism.

J. B. Handley, the father of an autistic boy, states in his book How to End the Autism Epidemic that he read all 27- 29 of the studies that are purported to prove that vaccines don’t cause autism (p88). The testing is conducted by the industry. Only one vaccine is studied, MMR (measles, mumps, rubella), and none of the studies use the proper control group – unvaccinated children. To determine whether vaccines cause autism one should not focus on one vaccine when children are given 16 vaccines and over 70 injections. As David Kirby, former NY Times investigative journalist wrote, “It is illogical to exonerate all vaccines, all vaccine ingredients, and the total US vaccine program as a whole, based solely on a handful of epidemiological studies of just one vaccine and one vaccine ingredient” (p.87, Handley, 2018).

Nor should one use as a control group subjects who are injected with another toxin, as is invariably done in vaccine studies. That is cheating. It is like comparing Salem with Marlboro, and concluding Salem does not increase the risk of cancer. Furthermore, safety testing for drugs lasts 5 years. With vaccines adverse events are recorded for a week or less, despite the fact that autoimmune illnesses take weeks or years to manifest. (Handley, p.229). The fact that this kind of “safety” testing is permitted – only for vaccines — tells us that the government is covering for the pharmaceutical industry and that it is not protecting children

For example, one study CDC used to demonstrate vaccines don’t cause autism compared children who received more mercury in their vaccines to children who received slightly less mercury (Handley, p.88). Yet, CDC was forced to admit, that even this study with a bogus placebo could “neither prove nor disprove” an association between mercury and autism. The same is true of the other “signature” study–referred to as the Tozzi study— which compared children who received 62.5 mcg to those who received 137.5 mcg of ethyl mercury, published in 2009 in Pediatrics and reached no conclusion (p90).

But that is not the end of it– the mainstream media also comes into play. The media might as well be a PR firm hired by Big Pharma.. As Handley points out: “The PR machine for these studies is something to behold. The Academy of Pediatrics [the pro-vaccine guild of pediatricians], publishes these studies, and on the day they are released, every major news organization in the country reports on the studies, and every article sends the same basic message: Vaccines are safe, and they don’t cause autism” (p.91). For example the AP headline for the Tozzi study was, “Study Adds to Evidence of Vaccine Safety.” This is the same message, the same lie, The New York Times asserted in the name of Science.

It is a sick society in which children cannot even depend on the government or honest people in the media to protect them. One would hope that journalists would feel some responsibility for the hundreds of thousands of children injured by their deceitful misrepresentations. But none have come forward to say as William Thompson said, “I have great shame now when I meet families with kids with autism because I have been part of the problem.”(See above) Yet they have all been complicitous in the deception of American families, in the poisoning of children.

Dr. Seth Farber ” Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccinataions, and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State

There is a religious aspect to the vaccine crusade: “The powerful vaccine ‘gospel’ has swept up regulators, medical trade associations, physicians, science journals, the popular press and others in a kind of consensus dogma that has become more important than the children [these institutions were] supposed to protect.” (CHD, 2018, p1). The children do not matter– these institutions exist to serve the State which itself exists primarily to serve the interests of corporate America. The children are of no more value than raw materials in a factory. Those who dissent, even parents of vaccine-injured children, are ridiculed as anti-science, “anti-vaxxers” and treated by the press as malefactors– in another era they would have been denounced as heretics and burned at the stake.

Again, I remind readers that the strongest evidence that vaccines are harmful is provided by the mass “experiment” brought about by the National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act (NCVIA) in 1986. In this “experiment” we compare those born before the act and those born afterwards. We are not looking at the results of one vaccine but all vaccines–since by the late 1990s almost all school children were adhering to the schedules mandated in all states. And although the control group (those who received half as many vaccines or even less in the 1950s) was not unvaccinated, the difference was stark, as mentioned. In the 1960s 1 in 10,000 kids had autism; in 1985, 1 in 2,500 10 yr old kids had autism; in 1989, 1 in 1,000; in 1999, 1 in 500; in 2000, 1 in 150; in 2008, 1 out of 88; in 2016:1 in 68. In the following section I will look at other illnesses caused by vaccines (https://www.nvic.org/getdoc/6cd24653-fd19-49e5-842a-3917e15de533/medical-science—public-trust.aspx).

I think most parents who think vaccines are safe have no idea about these statistics. I would guess that they never read the ingredients in the vaccines with which their children are injected.

Here is a partial list of the ingredients: thimerosal, aluminum, formaldehyde, antibiotics, egg protein, monosodium glutamate (MSG), squalene, gelatin, polysorbate 80, phenoxyethanol, aborted human fetal lung tissue, monkey kidney cells.

Thimerosal (mercury)–although it was supposedly removed from all vaccines it is still in the tetanus toxoid vaccine (Tt), and meningococcal vaccines and in flu shots, including some given to children and pregnant women. Like aluminum it is a neurotoxin–both have been implicated in autism. Aluminum is in at least half the vaccines mandated for children. J.B. Handley who read all the scientific studies on autism believes it is a most potent toxin, the one most responsible for autism. If we calculate the total aluminum dose from 36 vaccines given to the baby in the first few years, we see that the total dose is 30.6 mg—many times the 0.85 mg considered safe by the FDA. https://www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Formaldehyde is a well known carcinogen that is in a handful of vaccines. Gelatin can provoke an allergic response, including anaphylaxis.https://www.nvic.org/Doctors-Corner/Lawrence-Palevsky/Aluminum-and-Vaccine-Ingredients.aspx

Dr. Larry Palevsky

Many suspect the squalene-containing anthrax vaccine was responsible for Gulf War syndrome. (https://vaxxter.com/the-worst-ingredient-of-all/) Polysorbate 80 is in several vaccines; it is an emulsifier which caused cancer in animal tests but most importantly it is used in pharmacology to assist in the delivery of certain drugs across the blood-brain barrier. Pavelsky asks, “What viral, bacterial, yeast, heavy metal or other vaccine containing ingredient need to pass into the brains of our children?” It may account for the high concentrations of aluminum found in the brains of autistics. https://www.nvic.org/Doctors-Corner/Lawrence-Palevsky/Aluminum-and-Vaccine-Ingredients.aspx

MSG is an excitotoxin. Phenoxyethanol is a derivative of ethylene glycol, or antifreeze–it is currently used in 2 vaccines. The cell lines upon which the vaccine is grown include fetal lung tissue and monkey kidney cells.

These are a few of the more common ingredients that are intentionally included in vaccines. But contamination has been a continuous problem. For example, two contaminants were monkey virus in polio vaccines and pig viruses in rotavirus vaccines. In the 1950s up to a third of polio vaccines in the U.S. were contaminated with simian virus 40 (SV40), which came from the monkey kidney cell cultures used to make the vaccines. Institute of Medicine stated in 2002 that this could contribute to human cancer. Every time you grow human virus on animal tissue you run the risk of picking up an animal virus which would be included in the vaccine. Dr Judy Mikovits wrote, “Every scientist who works with these viruses …recognized the possibility that if you put human tissue and mouse tissue together, the possibility is that you’re going to pick up a virus that is silent in the mouse…but it kills the human or causes serious disease in the human. …[But] you might not see the cancer for two decades.”

https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/looking-back-looking-forward-cancer-and-vaccines/ Glyphosate, a carcinogen, was also found in several vaccines.

Of course very few patients–and few doctors–know what is in vaccines.According to Dr Lawrence Palevsky, “All the vaccine ingredients are poisonous, carcinogenic or potentially harmful to the skin, gastrointestinal, pulmonary, immune and neurological systems in our bodies.https://www.nvic.org/Doctors-Corner/Lawrence-Palevsky/Aluminum-and-Vaccine-Ingredients.aspx

Are all those toxins necessary for the efficacy of the vaccine? We don’t know but, as Kennedy notes, what we do know is that since Big Pharma has no liability there is no incentive for Big Pharma to spend the money to even try to make safer vaccines.

(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/truth-with-robert-f-kennedy-jr-episode-10/?itm_term=home) But with all those toxic ingredients, does not common sense indicate that vaccines are likely to entail considerable risk of harm? (We will see below that there is strong evidence that children vaccinated according to CDC mandates– and thus their doctor’s recommendations– are much sicker than unvaccinated children.) Would there be any readers here surprised and shocked if it turned out that injecting a stew of poisons into babies and toddlers every few months would have long lasting deleterious effects on their bodies?

When I first read the list of ingredients in vaccines my first thought was that there is no way I would voluntarily allow anyone to inject that into me! My second thought was: How could anyone inject those ingredients into a poor tiny baby? I think there are two kinds of people–those who are appalled when they read the list of ingredients, and those who think, “If the experts say so, it must be fine.”

I expect Everyday Concerned Citizen readers will be appalled. I think ordinary Americans would tend to agree, if they knew – but most don’t bother to investigate. They are convinced by the word of their doctor that vaccines are safe and effective. (Even today’s vaccine safety activists– like Polly Tommey— once trusted their doctors.) Not that their doctors know much if anything about vaccines but Americans assume they know.

Americans assume physicianss are the one profession to which they can safely surrender the care of their bodies and souls —in today’s disenchanted secular world, in the popular imagination doctors are our angels, they are messengers of the gods. The physician is Moses carrying the tablets down from the mountaintop where he or she communed with the Most-High.

To doubt the doctor, to doubt the vaccine, is to question the accumulated wisdom of civilization itself, the goodness of the social order in which we live, it is to disdain, to disrespect, the greatest achievement of the modern world – Medical Science. This is apostasy from civilized society, it is heresy, it is barbarism. Such persons, such contemptible “anti-vaxxers,” deserve to be excommunicated from the civilized world –in another era these blasphemers would have been executed.

By refusing to be vaccinated, they declare their defiance of civilization— these selfish miscreants, refusing the purification of the vaccine, threaten to pollute the tribe which has been purified and consecrated by vaccination. These potential carriers of the dangerous germs can contaminate the community, infest the innocent– they are a menace to society. (It is never explained why the vaxxed are not protected by the vaccines—but no matter, a scapegoat is needed.)

According to the sacred narrative of the Vaccine religion, it was vaccines that saved us from the scourges of smallpox and polio. The fact that historical research casts doubt upon this trope— casts doubt upon the decisive and indispensable role of vaccines, and that there were other factors that accounted for the disappearance of these epidemics (e.g. sanitation, improved hygiene) is irrelevant – to even assert this is itself a sacrilege (Humphries, 2013). Anathema upon the anti-science heretics who doubt vaccines!

The fundamentalist Christian knows that Jesus was the son of God who died for our sins and on the third day rose from the dead. So, the epigones of the Vaccine religion know that vaccines saved humanity from epidemics that threatened the existence of humanity itself, that protected us from suffering, death, pestilence, chaos. The memory of this collective trauma is activated every time the selfish ex-vaxxers attack vaccines today.

They are not only impugning the value of CDC’s ever growing schedule of vaccines—72 jabs for children– they implicitly threaten to undermine the hegemony of the narrative of the triumph of medical Science over chaos, over nature, they depreciate the sacred story of our miraculous redemption by the vaccine, by medical Science. Thus they threaten to destroy the sacred narrative which undergirds the multi-billion dollar vaccine industry–the vaccine industrial complex including Big Pharma, CDC, NIH, pediatricians, politicians and the mainstream media.

Such heretics, such malefactors who seek to convince others to shun vaccines do not deserve an audience. Civilized people should not enter into a debate with “enemies” of society, as The New York Times called them—most of these whiners are parents of vaccine-injured children.

Wrapped in the mantle of Science, the corrupted Editorial Board and publisher of The New York Times declare: “Scientists, especially, are uncomfortable with black-and-white statements, because science is all about nuance. But, in the case of vaccines, there are some hard truths that deserve to be trumpeted. Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism. Full stop.”

As I have demonstrated here this is categorically not the verdict of science. It is an edict of modern Inquisitors.

Polly Tommey was once deceived by the Times. Most of today’s “anti-vaxxers” were once true believers. They allowed the doctors to vaccinate their children, although they had no idea what was in the vaccines. They trusted the doctors. They became ex-vaxxers because of what they saw happen to their children. But they have never been anti-science.

More now than ever genuine scientists–not those employed by Big Pharma–are confirming the claims of parents of vaccine-injured children. It’s the vaccines that cause autism–in a subset of children who are less resilient. And it’s not just autism– they give many more children less severe chronic illnesses. But vaccine evangelists still want to claim they have the imprimatur of science.

The New York Times claimed in 2005 as it does today, that parents of vaccine-injured children have pitted themselves against science. Kennedy wrote in response that these parents are pitted not against science but against public health authorities who rely not on science but on the reputations of their agencies to exonerate vaccines.

J. B. Handley is an educated layperson who knows his science. Handley is a graduate of Stanford and father of an autistic child—and author of a book on the science of autism praised by leading scientists in the field (Handley, 2018). According to Handley it is the aluminum that causes autism. But although Handley says little about it, before aluminum became the object of attention, critics of vaccines thought it was mercury that caused autism and were able to demonstrate a correlation between mercury in the vaccines and autism. But when mercury was replaced by aluminum autism continued to rise.

Barbara Loe Fisher, a vaccine safety activist and mother of a vaccine injured child stated that “repeated use of multiple vaccines throughout childhood may cause neuroimmune dysfunction [including autism] via a variety of biological mechanisms” (Fisher, 2008, p.95). There are so many toxins in vaccines I do not believe we can put the responsibility on any one chemical. In other words, it is not just the mercury or aluminum that are the critical variables triggering autism–it is all the toxins and how they interact synergistically—and it is at the age at which the vaccines are given.

As Dr. Blaylock writes, “[S]equential, multiple vaccinations in newborns and small children maximizes the inflammation of the brain and as a consequence dramatically enhances the excitotoxic pathology, and does so for prolonged periods (decades). The more vaccines that are added to the vaccine schedule, the more frequently this devastating effect will be seen and in worse forms.” https://www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Nevertheless, scientific progress has been made in the last few years. Scientists who have studied the issue are convinced that vaccines cause autism in a subset of vulnerable children. In the light of what leading scientists who study toxiocology are saying, it is absurd for The New York Times to say science has determined vaccines are safe. This demonstrates that it has failed to uphold minimal standards of responsible journalism–and become little more than an organ of State and corporate propaganda. To reiterate, The Times had declared: “Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism.” The dirty secret is that it is not the anti-vaxxers who are “anti-science”–it is The New York Times and the mainstream press.

Dr. Russell Blaylock

We know now that the brains of autistic children and adults are in a state of permanent inflammation, and there are unusually high concentrations of aluminum in the brains of autistics. Blaylock notes that in a study done in 2005 (Vargas et al study) researchers examined the brains of 11 autistics from age 5 years to 44 years of age who had died without active infectious diseases as compared to age-matched controls. “That is, they found widespread activation of inflammatory cells (microglia and astrocytes) in the brains of the autistic patients.” https://www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Dr. Chris Exley

Chris Exley, “the world’s leading expert on aluminum neurotoxicity,” found in his famous 2017 study that autistics’ brain were loaded with aluminum: “My group has measured the aluminum content of probably more than one hundred human brains, and these brain tissues taken from the individuals with a diagnosis of autism were some of the highest we’ve measured bar none.” https://jbhandleyblog.com/home/2018/4/1/international2018

(https://www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md)

Handley explains that this discovery combined with the discovery that autistic brains are in a state of constant inflammation is the key to understanding autism. Handley says the brain’s immune system is in a constant battle with the aluminum that it doesn’t know how to get out of its body (p. 154). Handley notes his son was born in 2002: “He seemed to get sicker with every vaccine appointment and his head was always hurting.” (p.162) Inflammation would lead to a large brain and a swollen forehead. “Is that why children with autism are known to head bang?” (p.162). “We have new credible biological science showing us we are deliberately damaging our babies, and likely creating the autism epidemic” (p162).

The Scientists Talk Back to CDC

The FDA claims that aluminum is safe, a claim of course accepted by the CDC. But what have our regulatory agencies been relying upon to assess the safety of injected aluminum? One single study published in 2011 by Dr. Robert J. Mitkus in the journal Vaccine. Mitkus concluded that “for infants, our study demonstrates that there is little risk for aluminum toxicity following immunizations administered according to ACIP[CDC] recommendations even with maximal exposures to aluminum adjuvant.” (https://vaccinepapers.org/wp-content/uploads/FDA-aluminum-paper.pdf)

But look closer and you will see this is not science. This is a transparent scam. The study tested a much weaker substance (aluminum citrate instead of aluminum hydroxide),which was ingested not injected into the body, and it was administered to grown adults! And on the basis of this the FDA concluded that it is safe to inject a stronger chemical into a tiny baby! And then it assured parents on its website that it is safe to inject aluminum hydroxide into their babies. And The New York Times writes, “Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism. Full stop.” (https://www.nytimes.com/2019/01/19/opinion/vaccines-public-health.html)

Dr. Seth Farber | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccinations, and the emerging bio-fascist state

As Handley notes, “In no other drug on the planet (except vaccines) would safety standards be determined without using the actual product (aluminum hydroxide) administered in proper way (intramuscular injection) into proper population (infants).” (Handley, 2018, p.156) Handley quotes a scientist- critic: “Why do the vaccine promoters rely on oral-ingestion studies to defend Al adjuvant safety? It is because they have no experimental research showing that injecting Al adjuvant is safe! They are empty-handed” ( p156-7).

But CDC did not go unanswered. In Canada, France and England scientists who cared about children had been investigating on their own the toxicity of vaccines. In 2017 three of the leading toxicologists in the world got together and decided to jointly write letters to the three organizations supposedly protecting public health–the CDC, FDA and NIH. They obviously consulted each other since their letters were almost identical.

Dr. Christopher Shaw of the University of British Columbia wrote that the studies he did and “the broader existing literature regarding aluminum toxicity lead almost invariably to the conclusion that aluminum in any form is always neurotoxic.” In vaccines “they [adjuvants] may contribute to neurological disorders across the lifespan….In children there is growing evidence that aluminum adjuvants may disrupt developmental processes in the central nervous system and therefore contribute to ASD [autism spectrum disorder] in susceptible children.” He concluded: “In regard to the above it is my belief that CDC’s claim on its website that ‘Vaccines Do Not Cause Autism’ is wholly unsupported.” (Handley, 2018, p.166)

Dr. Chris Exley, a tenured professor at Keele University of Bioinorganic Chemistry and according to Handley, “without peer the leading expert in the world on the neurotoxicity of aluminum” described himself in his letter as “an expert in field of aluminum adjuvants and aluminum toxicity for 30 years during which time I have written in excess of 150 peer reviewed scientific publications.” He continued, “I strongly support the contention that aluminum adjuvants may have a role in the etiology of autism spectrum disorder.” His view is founded on “a scientific and burgeoning body of peer reviewed scientific evidence…The claim of CDC’s website that vaccines do not cause autism is unsupported with respect to aluminum adjuvants and this view stifles important research to determine the safety of aluminum adjuvants used in vaccines.” (Ibid, p.166)

Dr. Romain Gherardi of Universite Paris-Est is an expert in the field of aluminum adjuvant toxicity who has written 40 peer reviewed scientific publications and 1 book on the topic. He wrote, “I strongly support the contention that aluminum adjuvants may have a role in the etiology of autism spectrum disorder.” His view is founded on “a scientific and burgeoning body of peer reviewed scientific evidence.” “The claim of CDC’s website that vaccines do not cause autism is unsupported with respect to aluminum adjuvants…”(p.166)

Thus we see that the public perception shamelessly promoted by the press that vaccines are safe is contested by some of the leading toxicologists in the world. But they are not alone. Even the government’s own experts are now speaking out and contradicting CDC.

Andrew Zimmerman, MD and Richard Kelley, MD are “the two leading mainstream autism scientists in the world” (Handley, 2018, p.170). They were both key witnesses for many years for the government in the Vaccine Court. They were the experts who disputed parents’ claims that vaccines caused their children’s autism–until both of them changed their positions and concluded vaccines caused autism in a subset of children–25-40% of the autistic children, according to Kelley. Zimmerman’s testimony had helped deny the claims of over 5,000 children. Dr Zimmerman was the former director of medical research at the Kennedy Krieger Institute at Johns Hopkins University. Kelley was Professor of Pediatrics at Johns Hopkins University (Ibid,p.170).

In 2008 as a result of his friendship with a colleague who had an autistic daughter, Zimmerman changed his mind. He testified to the Vaccine Court that vaccines caused Hannah Poling’s autism (Handley, p.178). Hannah’s case was settled in her favor with a gag order on the family in 2007 (p.180). This was the end of Zimmerman’s career as a witness for the government in Vaccine Court (p.182).

In 2006 Zimmerman had co-authored with Jon Poling MD an essay about Hannah titled “Developmental Regression and Mitochondrial Dysfunction in a Child with Autism” in the The Journal of Child Neurology (Handley, 2018, p.179). But Hannah was not a singular case–the author had reevaluated the records of all the other patients with autism at Kennedy Krieger Institute and concluded that children with “mitochondrial dysfunction” (which he assumed was genetic) are more likely to become autistic between 18- 30 months if they are vaccinated (Handley, p.179).

In 2016 both Dr. Zimmerman and Dr. Richard Kelley testified in legal depositions in favor of Yates Hazlehurst whose parents claimed he had incurred autism as a result of his sensitivity to repeated vaccinations. Dr. Zimmerman testified that “people who work in the field of autism commonly see a relationship between infection, inflammation and the onset of [autistic]regression” (p195). In other words, inflammation triggered by vaccines leads to autism in susceptible populations. Kelley placed the percentage at 25- 40%.

Kelley acknowledged that he was now arguing for a link between vaccines and autism. The lawyer upon cross-examination inquired “Your opinion is contrary to.. the opinion of the CDC, correct?” Dr. Kelley responded: “It is contrary to their conclusion. It is not contrary to their data” (Handley, p. 199). Kelley could not be more blunt. In other words, As Handley notes: The data shows that vaccines cause autism but CDC does not admit this. This was testimony by 2 men who had been government witnesses for many years.

This testimony was given 3 years before The New York Times wrote that science had concluded “Vaccines are not toxic, and they do not cause autism. Full stop”. The editors of The Times had urged state and federal officials to launch an “aggressive and targeted social media campaign” of surveillance; to “monitor anti-vaccine websites” in order to defeat “the enemy” (See above.) Now it is over a year since the New York Times declared war. A censorship campaign has been launched on Youtube, Facebook, Google — at the behest of our government.

In March, U.S. Congressman Adam Schiff wrote to urge CEOs of Amazon, Facebook, and Google, to censor and delete content that raises doubt about vaccine safety. Other social media and internet giants followed suit including: YouTube, GoFundMe, Twitter, Instagram, Wikipedia, Pinterest, Etsy, and Mail Chimp. In 2019, news outlets such as Huffington Post have also removed dozens of articles about vaccine safety from their website. The press and the politicians are doing the bidding of Big Pharma at the expense of the 1st Amendment (https://ahrp.org/beware-of-medicine-marching-in-lockstep-with-government-personal-reflections)

Vera Sharav, Holocaust survivor and president of Alliance for Human Research Protection, writes that “these industry-funded pro-vaccine collaborators in government, the media, and academia” will not have an open public discussions about vaccines. I would add that Robert F. Kennedy Jr. is not even allowed on any television station. As Vera Sharav writes, “They won’t engage in public debate because their science is rigged, it can’t stand up to independent scrutiny…Caught in a web of deceptions, vaccine stakeholders are resorting to strong-arm police tactics to silence once and for all, those who challenge them. What is at issue globally is the human right to conscientious objection to medical interventions; freedom of choice and freedom of speech — a very dangerous combination.” (https://ahrp.org/beware-of-medicine-marching-in-lockstep-with-government-personal-reflections/)

(To Be Contd. Part Three of this article to follow shortly.)

Part One: Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part One

The other references are in the article. I listed Blaylock here because his article is on multiple sites.

REFERENCES

Blaylock, R. (2008), “Vaccines, Neurodevelopment and Autism Spectrum Disorders: The Danger of Excessive Vaccination During Brain Development:The Case for a Link to Autism Spectrum Disorders” www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Bruesewitz, R. (2012), “Justice Disserved: The Hannah Bruesewitz Odyssey” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Children’s Health Defense (2018), Conflicts of Interest Undermine Children’s Health, ebook, Children Health Defense.

Colbin, Annemarie (2012), “A Holistic Health Perspective,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Converse, Judy, (2012), “Sick is the New Healthy,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY:Skyhorse Publishing.

Cowan, Thomas (2018), Vaccines, Autoimmunity and the Changing Nature of Childhood Illness, White River Junction Vt: Chelsea Green Publishing.

Fisher, Barbara Loe (2008), Vaccines, Autism & Chronic Inflammation: The New Epidemic Worthington, Ohio: P.B.Industries.

Fitts, Catherine Austin ( 2020), ”Special Solari Report: Vaccine Mandates with Mary Holland, J.D.” https://home.solari.com/special-solari-report-vaccine-mandates-with-mary-holland-j-d, February 25, 2020

Handley,J. B.(2018), How to End the Autism Epidemic,White River Junction, Vt:: Chelsea Green Publishing

Holland, Mary (2010), “Reconsidering Compulsory Childhood Vaccination,” Public Law Research Paper,No. 10-64, NY:New York University School of Law.

Humphries, Suzanne and Roman Bystrianyk, (2013), Dissolving Illusions:Disease, Vaccines, and The Forgotten History, New York, CreateSpace Publishers (https://www.amazon.com/Dissolving-Illusions-Disease-Vaccines-Forgotten-dp-1480216895/dp/1480216895/ref=mt_other?_encoding=UTF8&me=&qid=1600662412).

Klein, Naomi (2008), The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism, New York: Picador.

Moskowitz, Richard (2006), “How Do Vaccines Work,” Pathways to Family Wellness, Issue 10, June-July 2006.

Moskowitz, Richard (2009) “On Anti-vaxxers,” Age of Autism, Jan, 2019. https://www.ageofautism.com/2019/01/dr-richard-moskowitz-md-on-anti-vaxxers.html

Moskowitz, Richard (2017), Vaccines: A Reappaisal, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Proctor, Robert. (1999) The Nazi War on Cancer. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press..

Stoller,K.P. (2019), “The Denial of Adverse Event Risk Following Immunization and the Loss of Informed Consent – A Perspective, ” ACTA SCIENTIFIC PAEDIATRICS, Vol. 2 Issue 1 January 2019

Szasz, Thomas (2001),The Therapeutic State:The Tyranny of Pharmacracy, Volume V, Number 4, Spring 2001,Independent Review.

Wilcox, Brent (2018), Jabbed: How the Vaccine Industry, Medical Establishment, and Government Stick It to You and Your Family, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Whitaker, Robert (2011), Anatomy of an Epidemic: Magic Bullets, Psychiatric Drugs, and the Astonishing Rise of Mental Illness in America, New York: Broadway Books.

Dr. Seth Farber: Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State | Part One

Report | Seth Farber, Ph.D | Dec 27, 2020

PART ONE

“We are not going to let you take our democracy away. We are not going to let you take our health away. We are not going to let you take our children away. We are not going to let you take our freedom away.”

–Robert Kennedy Jr

”(2) Fascism should rightly be called corporatism as it is the merger of government and corporate power.”

— Benito Mussolini

I was prompted to write this by my frustration with the silence of the radical left in the face of one of the greatest crimes against humanity of the modern era: I refer to the harm inflicted upon American children by the vaccine industry since the law re. the administration of vaccines was changed in 1986. And I refer to what appears now to be an attempted (ongoing) global fascist coup d’état, the success of which depends upon our continued acquiescence.

Image: DANGEROUS SECRECY: The CDC hides stats revealing number of Americans tested for the coronavirus as last shred of government transparency collapses in America

As Darren Allen, writing from England, aptly put it, (3) “the entire political left” meaning both the official left (the Democratic Party) and the radical left (he names Noam Chomsky, Caitlin Johnstone, John Pilger and Glenn Greenwald among others) “stood behind the crime of the century wholly and unequivocally.” They all agreed: “We just had to put millions and millions of people out of work then shut them up in a heavily policed panic room.” Allen posed a number of astute questions: “(4) Did they ask if anything else might have been motivating their leaders than altruistic concern for human life? Did they question the extraordinarily repressive measures governments have taken to contain the problem? Did they sound any alarm bells about rather suspicious proposed solutions such as an express vaccine, contact-tracing and so forth? Did any of these people ask any seriously critical, or even very interesting, questions? The answer to all of these questions was an almost entirely predictable no. Every man jack of them fell straight into line.”

((5)https://off-guardian.org/2020/08/15/the-reaction-of-the-left-to-lockdown/) Caitlin Johnstone, whose deconstruction of Russiagate had been brilliant, responded to Allen, “(6) I find the whole thing [Covid-19]ultimately irrelevant and boring and have nothing to add to the debate.”

(7) https://twitter.com/caitoz/status/1283547746411003904 This time around sadly Caitlin had drunk the Kool-Aid.

Phil Shannon also wrote an astringent critique of the left. His assessment was spot-on, “(8)The contemporary left’s support for an economically devastating, authoritarian lockdown, which doesn’t even achieve its limited public health aims, is one of the more remarkable developments in current politics.”

((9) https://lockdownsceptics.org/why-the-left-should-oppose-lockdown)

Almost all the iconic left-wing figures have been silent about this crime—and often supportive of the medical establishment. In a typical left trope, embraced even by many Marxists, Dr Fauci is the hero qua Scientist battling against the reactionary evil anti-science rube, Trump. Leftists have been so disoriented by TDS (Trump Derangement Syndrome) that they have not even noticed the merger of the state and Big Pharma and the dangers such an alliance poses. However, it should be noted, this failure predated Trump’s ascension as leftists have been giving a pass to CDC and vaccines for decades.

To be fair, Naomi Klein did make a powerful critique of the threat to democracy and individual rights represented by the solutions crafted by Silicon Valley and the government under the pretext of combatting the virus—but tellingly she accepted without reservations the official public health bureaucracy’s dubious claims about the virus. Thus, it never occurs to, her that this is a health crisis that is largely manufactured and she does not question the specious assumption that a vaccine is the ultimate solution.

(10) https://theintercept.com/2020/05/08/andrew-cuomo-eric-schmidt-coronavirus-tech-shock-doctrine/

The left should be in the forefront criticizing the lockdown. Brilliant critiques have been written by holistic doctors or scientists (usually with liberal or radical left orientations) such as Thomas Cowan M.D. or Joseph Mercola, D.O., by paleo-conservatives, by Libertarians, and by America’s most famous living iconic liberal Democrat, Robert Kennedy Jr. (Obama is not a liberal.) Kennedy, the founder of Children’s Health Defense, has taken a heroic and robustly non-conformist stance. Affirming the democratic legacy of his famous martyred forbears, influenced by the past writings of Klein herself, Kennedy has rued the dereliction of the left and put his finger on the economic and political impediments to the realization of “American values” — the title of his political memoir.

Kennedy points out the tragic irony: Infatuated with the idols of Science and “public health” the left has forgotten its own bedrock principle—that corporate power and corporate money corrupt. Thus, with no hope of financial gain itself, the ideological left has allied itself with corrupt government agencies and corrupted government officials. Kennedy writes, “Slate and other liberal online publications including Salon, Huffington Post and Daily Beast customarily block articles that critique vaccine safety in order, they argue, to encourage vaccination and protect public health. Motivated by this noble purpose, the liberal media—the supposed antidote to corporate and government power—has helped insulate from scrutiny the burgeoning vaccine industry and its two regulators, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Both agencies have pervasive and potentially corrupting financial entanglements with the vaccine manufacturers, according to extensive congressional investigations.”

(11) https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccines-and-the-liberal-mind/

As a result of this alliance citizens are being poisoned by their own government acting as a tool and a beneficiary of Big Pharma. The left itself, by its silence, and its cheerleading for “science” and vaccines has unwittingly aided in the cover-up of these crimes. Dr Anthony Fauci said “there is a general anti-science, anti-authority, anti-vaccine feeling among some people in this country – an alarmingly large percentage of people..” https://www.collective-evolution.com/2020/07/08/dr-fauci-says-individual-institutions-may-make-the-coronavirus-vaccine-mandatory/

Sadly much of the left seems to accept Fauci’s claim— they fail to realize that the critics of vaccines are not against science but against the pseudo-science that results from the corruption and greed of scientists.

This essay is thus a call to the left to affirm democracy and individual rights and take a stand against Big Pharma and mandatory vaccination, against bio-fascism. To do anything less is to betray the tradition of which the left is heir, from Jesus to Karl Marx to Eugene Debs —as champion of the rights of all human beings and critics of a system in which the elites mobilize the power of the State to pursue their own interests to the detriment of the demos, the citizenry. Today that means unmasking the pretensions of those who claim to act as guardians of the greater good of all, as agents of a “sanitary utopia” (Proctor, p.11) in which there is a vaccine for every conceivable illness– which every individual will be forced to take for the greater good.

The Nuremberg Code— The Defense of the Individual and Informed Consent

On December 9, 1946, after the defeat of the Nazis, an American military tribunal opened criminal proceedings against 23 leading German doctors and administrators charged with crimes against humanity for their participation either in medical experiments against inmates in concentration camps, or in the Euthanasia Program, the extermination of those deemed mentally or physically defective.

General Telford Taylor who was Chief of Counsel during the “Doctors’ Trial” stated in his opening statement, “These defendants…are not ignorant men. Most of them are trained physicians and some of them are distinguished scientists. Yet these defendants, all of whom were fully able to comprehend the nature of their acts, and most of whom were exceptionally qualified to form a moral and professional judgment in this respect, are responsible for wholesale murder and unspeakably cruel tortures.” https://www.ushmm.org/information/exhibitions/online-exhibitions/special-focus/doctors-trial/opening-statement/charges. These words underline a cautionary tale for those readers today who think doctors can do no wrong.

Several of the doctors on trial argued that their experiments were undertaken for the greater good of humanity. Before rendering their judgment, the judges felt compelled to respond to the argument of the defense that the experiments were undertaken “for the greater good.” The first principle of the Code on “medical experiments” was: “The voluntary consent of the human subject is absolutely essential.” And thus the code affirmed the right of, and spelled out the conditions for, truly informed consent (https://www.jewishvirtuallibrary.org/the-nuremberg-code). No collective goal however noble, can ever trump the rights of the individual. To put it in other terms, our bodies are not the property of the state. Nor of Bill Gates. We are not slaves. We are endowed with inalienable rights, including life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness—so says the tradition of which we as Americans are heirs.

The Nuremberg Code deals with medical experimentation—as we will see, vaccines are experimental because none of them had been safety- tested before the (corrupted) “regulatory” agency (CDC) gave them their approval. But the Nuremberg Code has since been expanded, The latest convention is the 2005 UNESCO Declaration on Bioethics and Human Rights adopted by over 190 countries. It states: “Any preventive, diagnostic and therapeutic medical intervention is only to be carried out with the prior, free and informed consent of the person concerned, based on adequate information.” https://en.unesco.org/themes/ethics-science-and-technology/bioethics-and-human-rights. The mandatory vaccination of children is a violation of the right of informed consent. And the mandatory vaccination of adults with experimental vaccines now being implemented in the developed world is even more ominous.

As a dissident psychologist, for many years I have supported the right of informed consent, of freedom from torture and coercion, of two different groups whose autonomy was abrogated, whose bodies were violated by the State. I supported the rights of “mental patients” – many of whom now choose to call themselves “psychiatric survivors” — to resist the forced administration of toxic psychiatric drugs, authorized by the State and Psychiatry, subsidized by Big Pharma. And later, five years ago, I first discovered that there were “targeted individuals” (TIs), individuals who claimed (most, accurately) to be victims of “group stalking” or torture with “directed energy weapons” in the hands of US Intelligence or US military or rogue elements from these groups. (See my discussion The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times (https://everydayconcerned.net/2016/12/12/seth-farber-ph-d-the-psychiatric-metanarrative-targeted-individuals-and-the-deep-state-a-response-to-the-new-york-times/#Torture))

These claims are continually mocked by the mental health establishment and the corporate press, which claims the people reporting these attacks are really “paranoid-schizophrenics” who are hearing voices. In a lengthy article I excoriated the mental health establishment for its negligence in failing to examine the evidence (presented by TIs and whistle-blowers)—and thus wittingly or unwittingly participating in a cover-up. Finally in 2020 the United Nations Human Rights Council Special Rapporteur for Torture, Professor Nils Melzer affirmed that the technology that TIs claim has been used to torture them does indeed exist. Professor Melzer has met with Magnus Olsson, Director of EUCACH, the European Coalition Against Covert Harassment and recognizes that TIs are legitimate victims of cyber-torture. Professor Melzer is developing an international legal framework to regulate the use of cyber technologies and prevent the torture of innocent persons.

(https://everydayconcerned.net/2020/03/14/magnus-olsson-eucach-director-un-starts-investigation-to-ban-cyber-torture)

This country has a history of treating the bodies of its citizens as if they were the property of the state or the deep state. Americans have been subjected to nonconsensual experimentation, exploitation and (12) abuse about which they often receive no information–a clear violation of the Nuremberg Code. President Clinton apologized in the mid-90s to individuals and their surviving family members “who were harmed by human radiation experiments conducted by the federal government during the Cold War.” (https://www.chicagotribune.com/news/ct-xpm-1995-10-04-9510040315-story.html) The MK-Ultra program of the CIA is the most infamous example of experiments performed on unwitting and /or involuntary subjects. The program involved more than 150 human experiments/tortures involving psychedelic drugs, paralytics and electroshock therapy. (https://www.history.com/topics/us-government/history-of-mk-ultra)

The right to informed consent, to control one’s own body, is under attack today–and parents have been robbed of the right to exercise the authority to determine which medical procedures their children will undergo. Vaccine mandates place the authority for determining what is best for children not in the hands of their parents, nor even of their personal physicians, but of government bureaucrats more committed to the interests of Big Pharma than to the well-being of children. Vaccine mandates became common between the late 1960s and 1970s. By 1980 all 50 states had required school vaccines for measles and several other vaccine-preventable childhood diseases. But there were only a few vaccines in 1980. (Reconsidering Compulsory Childhood Vaccination, https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=1677565)

Vera Sharav, Holocaust survivor and president of Alliance for Human Research Protection (AHRP) wrote.

“As was the case in 1935, state-supported censorship and recent government decrees eviscerating fundamental parental rights and the professional judgment of medical doctors, have failed to raise protests from mainstream medicine, from the Ivy Towers of academia or from the corporate-controlled media. Instead, these powerful institutions are protecting their financial stake in the business of vaccines.”

(https://efvv.eu/content/mrs-vera-sharav)

Furthermore, something new and even more ominous has been occurring since COVID-19. With COVID-19 as pretext, the State is beginning to force toxic vaccines upon adults, upon all Americans. Vaccine evangelist and fanatic Bill Gates says he wants to force vaccines upon “almost” the entire world population. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/gates-and-companys-covid-19-vaccine-boosterism-ignores-significant-sars-coronavirus-vaccine-risks-known-for-over-a-decade) Del Bigtree, film producer and vaccine rights activist aptly said on his cable show, The Highwire, “Big Pharma is trying to take over the world.” This is not hyperbole.

The Autism Epidemic

The assault on informed consent by Big Pharma and the state began as soon as vaccines began to become popular—with vaccine mandates. Before we look at how the state came to preempt the rights of parents, I want to emphasize that in no sense is this a process of benevolent paternalism. Although the State claims to be acting in the interest of public health and the greater good, when it arrogates parents’ rights to make medical decisions for their children, the results indicate that it is acting to further the interests of Big Pharma and those in government who profit from sale of vaccines at the expense of children’s safety and health. Although mandates exist in all states, in some states (e,g., California, New York, Maine), religious exemptions have been eliminated and even medical exemptions are not left to child’s own physician but must conform to narrow criteria devised by Centers for Disease Control (CDC)— and the child’s doctor can be overruled by school officials (in NY) or government bureaucrats (CDC is the regulatory agency discussed below).

The most obvious and the most tragic consequence, albeit just one of many, of the domination of Big Pharma and the State over public health has been the autism epidemic. In the early 1980s, 1 in 10,000 children had autism; in 1989, 1 in 1,000; in 1999, 1 in 500; in 2000, 1 in 150; in 2008, 1 out of 88; in 2016:1 in 68. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/enough-already-autism-needs-to-be-declared-a-national-health-crisis/) Why the jump between the early 80s and 1989? According to Children’s Health Defense, in 1989, the CDC dramatically changed the vaccine schedule, increasing mercury exposures to American children from 70 to 237.5 mcg before age two. Even the EPA calls 1989 “The Gateway Year,” because of the epidemic of neurodevelopmental and immune system diseases that suddenly appeared in children born that year and afterward. (Later mercury was removed but aluminum was increased.)

In 1983 the CDC-recommended vaccine schedule was 22 doses of 7 vaccines by 6 years old. In 2017 it had more than doubled to 50 doses of 14 vaccines by age 6. From birth to 18 it jumped from 24 doses of 7 vaccines to 69 doses of 16 vaccines. (And more are on the way.) (https://www.nvic.org/cmstemplates/nvic/pdf/downloads/1983-2017-vaccine-schedules.pdf) And there are more children being vaccinated today and the load of toxins in the vaccines has increased exponentially. Thus, the mercury dosage tripled in the 1990s before it was replaced by aluminum.

Furthermore in 1983, the CDC directed doctors to give a child no more than 4 vaccines (DPT, polio) at one time. By 2013, the CDC directed a child can receive 8 or more vaccines at once.(https://www.nvic.org/cmstemplates/nvic/pdf/49-doses-posterb.pdf)

These numbers tell a very simple story. The autism epidemic began in the late 1980s after the enactment of National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act (NCVIA) in 1986 –this is when the number of vaccines increased and the percentage of children taking vaccines increased most dramatically (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/cdc-still-paralyzed-by-autism-epidemic-report-shows-one-in-59-children-in-the-us-now-affected/).

There is scientific evidence–denied by CDC and the press– that vaccines cause autism among the most vulnerable, which I will discuss below. But for the casual observer I think the strongest evidence that vaccines cause autism comes from two sources. First, is the verdict of common sense. Is it purely coincidental that the incidence of autism increases with the number of toxic vaccines to which children are subjected and with the number of children taking the vaccines as a result of government mandates, i.e. coercion?

Second, is the testimony of parents, chiefly mothers—most of whom regard themselves not as “anti-vaxxers” but “ex-vaxxers.” These were people who trusted vaccines, who trusted their doctors, but who later became convinced on the basis of their experiences with their own autistic infants that they had been injured by vaccines. They believed, they trusted, they were betrayed –by their government, by pediatricians who never warned them of the risks and who often coaxed them to vaccinate if they manifested “vaccine hesitancy.” And thus, these mothers became the mass base and the backbone of the movement against vaccine mandates.

Their voices can be heard in the movie Vaxxed 2 (not Vaxxed). It is a painful movie to watch, but it presents the most powerful argument against vaccines– or at least against the promiscuous use of them mandated by Centers for Disease Control– that I’ve seen or read, more so than any text, or scientific study. They are interviewed by Polly Tommey, a former actress and mother of an autistic child, who traveled across the country interviewing people for the film.

One after another the parents speak, and all tell the same story of innocence destroyed: a happy precocious child who had one jab too many and he/she regressed forever into an agonizing scarcely human autistic state. This is the archetypal myth of Garden of Eden, the loss of paradisaical innocence. And in the movie one actually sees the innocent pre-injury baby (e,.g., “home movies” –videos– taken of joyous babies before the event) and then one sees a withdrawn tormented baby and one sees these anguished parents fixated on images of their happy baby before the vaccination, burdened with regret and guilt and haunted forever by the memory of a happy curious baby–before the Fall—, haunted by their dreams of what might have been, if only they had listened to their own gut feeling, and not their doctor.

Polly is herself an ex-vaxxer. As she told us in the previous Vaxxed movie, when her “hippie” mother warned her that vaccines were dangerous, she scoffed, “Oh Mother, don’t be ridiculous. If vaccines were harmful it would be on the front page of The New York Times, my pediatrician would be calling me up to warn me.” Now Polly is a leading activist, a close ally of Robert Kennedy Jr.

In Vaxxed 2, Polly interviews not only parents whose infants were seriously damaged (mostly autistic) by the vaccines but also teenagers who were crippled by the vaccine for human papillomavirus given to kids between 9 and 26, recently expanded to 46 yrs old. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/molecular-mimicry-body-confusion-of-self-and-non-self-more-evidence-on-hpv-vaccines-and-autoimmunity/).

This vaccine is largely responsible for an increase in infant mortality (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/childrens-health/sudden-cardiac-deaths-in-young-people/)

She described the experience of the film crew: “What we saw, none of us were prepared for….We knew there was a problem with autism… but nothing prepared us for what I described as a war zone out here in America. It was like a blood bath of death and injury. It was literally like walking out onto a battlefield…. But the death, the dead babies, the dead toddlers, the dead teenagers…—all this death was being silenced…[N]othing but death, destruction, paralysis, injury beyond belief here in America.”

(https://www.ageofautism.com/2019/10/video-interview-with-vaxxed-ii-executive-producer-polly-tommey.html)

We will discuss below how and why the State came to abdicate its regulatory function. What I want to do first is to convey a sense of the scope of the tragedy with which many Americans are living and of which most of us are unaware primarily because of the role of the government and the press in covering it up.

Robert Kennedy Jr. describes the characteristics of the autistic–the majority are severe cases, not the cases on the “mild” end of Autistic Spectrum Disorder that used to be called Asperger’s. “Twenty-five percent will be non-verbal. Half of them are prone to wandering. Thirty percent have seizures. Many of them will have horrific bowel disease and classic sleep disorders. Most of them will have extreme light and noise sensitivities. They will focus on spinning objects. They will endlessly repeat phrases (Echolalia). They will read without understanding (Hyperlexia). Their heads may be enlarged (Macrocephaly). They will be unable to point their finger or engage in eye contact.” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/autism-epidemic-real/)

Let’s look at a typical autism case, Hannah Bruesewitz, whose suit against Big Pharma was rejected by the Supreme Court in 2011, described poignantly by her father. Hannah was a normal child–at 6 months old in 1992 she was given her 3rd DPT (diphtheria, pertussis, and tetanus) shot. That evening shortly after putting Hannah to bed, her mother heard her scream. Her mother rushed in and found her in the midst of a grand mal seizure. Hannah was soon on her way “to the first of many hospitalizations.” (Bruesewitz, p.105) Hannah remained in ICU for several days. The first hospital stay lasted 15 days during which Hannah had over 125 seizures. Her father writes, “To this day, I look back at that time as one of watching the light go out of my daughter’s eyes, a light that has never returned” (Ibid, p106)

Over the next 16 months hospitalization was required whenever a succession of seizures would not stop. Hannah “progressed physically, but she was regressing cognitively.” When it was necessary to give her Valium to stop the seizures, she became agitated in response, screaming and “flailing” so that her parents had to put a cage top on her crib for her safety. When not agitated, her demeanor was “flat and expressionless,” no longer smiling as she did in the past. (Ibid, p.106) Any vocabulary she had was lost. Finally, in 2011 the Supreme Court ruled that Hannah had no right to sue the manufacturers because vaccines were “unavoidably unsafe” and therefore the manufacturers deserved complete immunity—a non-sequitur delivered by a callous corporate friendly Court, with 2 dissenting judges (p.113)

Encephalitis or brain inflammation is common after vaccine injections. “High-pitched crying inconsolable screaming head banging, rocking, seizures, convulsions, and staring episodes…are all indications of brain inflamation.” (Colbin, p.283) Russell Blaylock MD notes that after a series of vaccinations babies will cry in a “very pitched tone” that often will continue for weeks or months along with lethargy and poor eating. These symptoms are “secondary to brain inflammation – resulting in what we call an encephalitic cry” ( https//www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md)

Parents know that cry well. It is because of the permanent brain inflamation that autistic children often repeatedly bang their head against a wall–as if they are trying to put the fire out.

Robert Kennedy Jr. knows well their plight. Kennedy, an environmentalist and lawyer, best known because of his revered father Robert F. Kennedy and uncle, President John F. Kennedy Jr., was beseeched by mothers of vaccine-injured children 15 years ago to take up their cause and after he investigated their claims he decided they were right. So, Kennedy, an extremely eloquent and erudite intellectual, heroically risked his reputation and friendships to become the leader and spokesman of a controversial highly maligned cause—- probably the only person of his stature to become an “anti-vaxxer,” as he is contemptuously termed by the press. Bobby, as he is usually called by friends and supporters, described their nightmare eloquently in an interview, “Just spend some time with a child who has severe autism. Life for these children is an endless agonizing progression of twilight and terror. The tormenting gut aches, excruciating sensory sensitivities, the serial head banging and screaming, the isolation and perpetual joylessness. The entire family is permanently devastated. Now multiply that by ten million.” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/mercury-vaccines-cdcs-worst-nightmare/)

Autistic children remain imprisoned for life in their own private hell. What kind of country is this where our own government allows children to be poisoned so that Big Pharma can make billions of dollars and pediatricians and government bureaucrats can pad their incomes? And what is the rationale? So Johnny does not get measles? It is not only those who oppose vaccines who are pilloried but even those doctors or parents who want to modify the schedule (24-25 injections by age 2) are likely to incur the wrath of the establishment.

Of course, CDC says this is all for health of the children. Dr. Russell Blaylock MD responds, “And I can assure the elite of the American Academy of Pediatrics and the CDC that over one million autistic children far exceeds the danger measles, mumps, diphtheria, chickenpox, tetanus, rotavirus, HiB meningitis and hepatitis pose to our youth. Also, keep in mind that for every fully autistic child, there are ten times that many with lesser degrees of impairment.” (https://www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md)

But the physical agony of the child and the loss of an opportunity for a ordinary life is not the only cost Americans pay to enrich their doctors and Big Pharma. Katie Wright, mother of an autistic child, describes the life of the autistic family. “These families often have siblings who watch their ASD brother bang his head with a closed fist. Parents and siblings sometimes endure hours of screaming meltdowns while frantically trying to soothe the child with autism.” Families rarely get a normal night’s sleep. Socializing is often impossible. “Family events or trips to a restaurant or park can quickly go from good to bad,” requiring a sudden departure. The finances of these families are drained by autism-related expenditures. Near death experiences due to seizures are common. “Parents often live in a permanent “fight or flight” mode. Careers are curtailed, marriages ruined, vacations not taken, and siblings’ college plans go unfunded.” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/natures-a-primer-in-autism-ignores-pain-and-illness-of-individuals-with-autism-katie-wright-sounds-off/)

The National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act–Crimes against Humanity

In the 1960s, the federal government began to assume the role of establishing vaccine immunization policy. Government experts within the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) adopted the goal of eradicating infectious disease. The federal government arranged for the establishment of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) which first met in 1964. ACIP was created under the Public Health Service Act to “assist states in the prevention and control of communicable diseases” (Holland, 2010 p.16). Its charter required it to prepare a list of vaccines for federal subsidy. States today under the 1986 National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act adopt the ACIP-recommended vaccines for vaccine schedules for children.

Previous to the creation of ACIP, vaccine mandates were rare and used in emergencies–in accord with Supreme Court’s 1905 Jacobson v Massachusetts’ ruling, But ACIP has created an “infrastructure” that pushes mandates for any and every ostensible vaccine-preventable illness. Thus, as multiple vaccines were required for school attendance in all 50 states, the number of children injured by vaccines began increasing.(https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccine-mandates-results-dont-safeguard-childrens-rights-or-health-how-did-we-get-here/) Because the costs of paying for the damages to vaccine-injured children were high, Big Pharma threatened to stop manufacturing vaccines. According to Holland this is why the National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act (NCVIA) was passed. “The rationale for this protection of industry was to ensure a stable childhood vaccine supply and to keep vaccine prices affordable.” (p.22)

The National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act (NCVIA) passed in 1986 was a watershed for Big Pharma. The vaccine supply at the time the Act was passed was comprised of the seven vaccines children then received – polio, diphtheria, pertussis, tetanus, measles, mumps and rubella. ACIP now recommends 70 doses of 16 vaccines to children, including vaccines for diseases rarely fatal in the United States, such as varicella and rotavirus, and diseases not contagious through ordinary social contact, such as hepatitis B and human papilloma virus. (Holland, p26). Clearly the Act let loose forces that were more interested in making money than ensuring a safe and stable vaccine supply: The more vaccines, the more money. For Big Pharma the Act triggered “a new gold rush,” as Kennedy Jr put it.

The Act granted pharmaceutical companies blanket immunity from liability for injuries and deaths resulting from all childhood vaccines that were on the ACIP’s recommended childhood schedule –- “no matter how toxic the ingredients, how negligent the manufacturer or how grievous the harm,” as Kennedy put it. (Kennedy, Jr. RF. “Vaccines and the liberal mind.” Children’s Health Defense, June 14, 2018. https:// childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccines-and-the-liberal-mind/)

The law enabled Big Pharma to avoid the kind of rigorous and costly safety testing required for other drugs, and removed the potential penalties involved in marketing vaccines that were harmful. Further it “also removed lawyers, judges and courts from their traditional roles as guardians of vaccine safety.” Since the law’s passage, Big Pharma’s revenues from vaccines have skyrocketed from a mere $1 billion to $44 billion. (Ibid). The Bill unwittingly created the conditions for what became a war not so much on diseases but on children, a war on American citizens by their own government in league with the pharmaceutical industry.

(Kennedy, Jr. RF. “Vaccines and the liberal mind.” Children’s Health Defense, June 14, 2018. https:// childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccines-and-the-liberal-mind)

NCVIA also created a system of government compensation for vaccine injuries and deaths, National Vaccine Injury Compensation Program (VICP), commonly referred to as Vaccine Court. The state itself, Department of Health and Human Services, is the respondent of all vaccine injury claims. (Holland,p.21) The Vaccine Court accorded victims at best a tiny amount of what could be attained in a civil trial– for example, a maximum of a mere quarter million dollars for a child’s death resulting from a vaccine.

As the number of mandated childhood vaccines skyrocketed, so did deaths and injuries. And although it is estimated that only 1% of vaccine injuries are reported, the financial strain on Vaccine Court (subsidized by the American taxpayer) led it to be more reluctant to grant compensation than was initially planned. Thus in the 3 decades since its creation only one third of the petitioners (1% of the injured)`have been compensated, at a total of $4 billion– the tip of the iceberg of immense suffering (CHD, 2018, p.5).

A large part of the reason for this debacle was because the laws that applied to childhood vaccination mandates did nothing to establish neutral and conscientious regulatory agencies, an absolutely essential measure to protect the public in light of Big Pharma’s exemption from liability. It was not only that the regulatory agencies were captured, i.e., staffed by persons with egregious conflicts of interest—worse, these agencies became part of the vaccine industry, subsidiaries of Big Pharma. Thus the members of these agencies mobilized all the powers of the state in order to further the interests of the pharmaceutical industry. (Kennedy, Jr. RF. “Vaccines and the liberal mind.” Children’s Health Defense, June 14, 2018. https:// childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccines-and-the-liberal-mind)

The Act located “vaccine promotion, safety and compensation” under one umbrella at the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) (Holland, p25), as if organizations involved in the promotion of vaccines could at the same time be entrusted to protect the safety of children! The seeds of corruption were implanted from the start. The result, as Holland noted, was that promotion of vaccines and other profit-making activities, not the safety and welfare of children, came to be the priority of the government agencies–of HHS, FDA, CDC and ACIP. The main regulatory agency for vaccines, Centers for Disease Control was aptly described by Kennedy as a subsidiary of the pharmaceutical industry. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/mercury-vaccines-cdcs-worst-nightmare) The result of these developments was one of the great American tragedies of the 20th century– the most severe health crisis in modern American history. It must also be described as one of the greatest crimes of the 20th century state against its own citizens.

The Act located “vaccine promotion, safety and compensation” under one umbrella at the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) (Holland, p25), as if organizations involved in the promotion of vaccines could at the same time be entrusted to protect the safety of children!

Dr. Seth Farber | Big Pharma, Mandatory Vaccination and the Emerging Bio-Fascist State 

Those very groups that Americans assumed were their most trustworthy protectors betrayed their moral mandate. Vera Sharav, Holocaust survivor and President of the Alliance for Human Research Protection wrote: “Public health officials and the medical profession have abrogated their professional, public, and human responsibility, by failing to honestly examine the iatrogenic harm caused by expansive, indiscriminate, and increasingly aggressive vaccination policies” (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/vaccine-program-betrayal-public-trust-institutional-corruption-part-3-7/)

Thus, as Holland observed, there was inadequate safety testing; under-compensation of vaccine-injured children; failure to inform parents about the risks of vaccines—on the other hand, parents were subjected to severe penalties for non-compliance with vaccination mandates (Holland, 24-5). Even when religious exemptions exist, courts have sometimes found parents liable for child neglect –they have mandated child removal and forced vaccination of children in families who have asserted religious objections. (Holland, pp13-4)

Barbara Loe Fisher, a vaccine-safety activist also noted that DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) was not a neutral body–no wonder safety was never prioritized: “It is a conflict of interest for DHHS to be in charge of vaccine safety and also license vaccines, and take money from drug companies to fast-track vaccines, and partner with drug companies to develop and share profits from vaccine sales, and make national vaccine policies that get turned into state vaccine laws….” (https://www.nvic.org/NVIC-Vaccine-News/September-2014/Remove-Vaccine-Safety-Oversight-From-DHHS.aspx)

Each government agency failed to fulfill its role in protecting the safety of children for predictable reasons. The FDA is responsible for the initial licensing phase of the vaccines, and the specific FDA committee charged with vaccine licensing is the Vaccine and Related Biological Products Advisory Committee (VRBPAC.) There was an investigation of VRBPAC by the US Government Reform Committee of Congress and they concluded, “The overwhelming majority of members, “both voting members and consultants, “have substantial ties to the pharmaceutical industries,” which is making huge profits on those vaccines. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/frequently-asked-questions) Thus it is no wonder that toxic vaccines were licensed.

Once FDA approves a vaccine, it goes over to the CDC’s Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) and they decide whether or not to add that vaccine to the schedule of mandated vaccines. In 2000, an investigation by the US Government Reform Committee of the United States Congress found the same kind of conflicts of interest in CDC as they had initially found in FDA. In 2009 nothing had changed. A government report in 2009 concluded that most of the experts who served on advisory panels to evaluate whether vaccines were safe had “potential conflicts of interest that were never resolved….Some were legally barred from considering the issue but did so anyway” “Most of the advisers ..had either a job or a grant from a {pharmaceutical] company or other entity whose interests were affected by the committees’ discussions, and a considerable number also owned stock in such companies.” (Harris Gardiner, Dec 17, 2009.)

Advisers on Vaccines Often Have Conflicts, Report Says (https://www.nytimes.com/2009/12/18/health/policy/18cdc.html) (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/frequently-asked-questions)

To call the CDC a captured agency would be an understatement. It is a subsidiary of the pharmaceutical industry. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/mercury-vaccines-cdcs-worst-nightmare) It is “a major player in the vaccine marketplace”: It buys half of all childhood vaccines in the U.S. and then sells them at a profit to public health agencies through the Vaccines for Children (VFC) Program, which pushes free and low-cost vaccines on indigent children. Over the past three decades, the CDC’s vaccine purchases have increased 15-fold, as the number of vaccines children are mandated to take has skyrocketed–while vaccine companies have raked in the profits. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/close-ties-and-financial-entanglements-the-cdc-guaranteed-vaccine-market/)

A 2017 analysis of Google patents results showed that the CDC held 56 patents pertaining to various aspects of vaccine development, manufacturing, delivery and adjuvants. By April 2019, a new search found CDC held155 patents, and a separate legal website display, both vaccine- and non-vaccine-related. The author of the 2017 analysis suggests that the large number of patents held by the CDC “deserves an in-depth review to determine exactly what current financial relationships with vaccine makers now exist and what…current impact those revenue streams are likely having on vaccine safety positions” (Conflicts, p.12).

To call the CDC a captured agency would be an understatement. It is a subsidiary of the pharmaceutical industry. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/about-us/mercury-vaccines-cdcs-worst-nightmare) It is “a major player in the vaccine marketplace”: It buys half of all childhood vaccines in the U.S. and then sells them at a profit to public health agencies through the Vaccines for Children (VFC) Program, which pushes free and low-cost vaccines on indigent children.

DR. SETH FARBER | BIG PHARMA, MANDATORY VACCINATION AND THE EMERGING BIO-FASCIST STATE 

Robert Kennedy Jr aptly asked, “So the American people have to wonder, are the scheduled vaccines that CDC is advising them to take, which become mandatory under state law, are those being added to advance public health or..because..somebody is making a profit from them?” (Wilcox 2018, p.122)

As the vaccine program expanded and as the state was brought in to promote vaccines and to coerce parents into vaccinating, it was increasingly important to obtain the cooperation of the medical establishment which helped to “manufacture consent”– the consent of the pediatricians who promoted and administered the vaccines, and of the parents mandated to submit their children to an ever growing number of vaccines. This manufacture of consent has been accomplished to an unprecedented degree. CHD writes, “The powerful vaccine “gospel” has swept up regulators, medical trade associations, physicians, science journals, the popular press and others “in a kind of consensus dogma” that has become “more important than the children [these institutions were] supposed to protect.” (p1 Conflicts.)

But above all, doctors, the secular priesthood in modern society, lent these programs a facade of legitimacy. Vera Sharav, holocaust survivor and president of Alliance for Human Research Protection wrote, “The plight of thousands [millions] of real children, who have suffered irreversible neurological harm following the administration of multiple vaccinations simultaneously, is willfully ignored by the medical establishment…” Worse it is the medical establishment which manufactures consent, by insisting that ”vaccines are safe and effective” (https://ahrp.org/beware-of-medicine-marching-in-lockstep-with-government-personal-reflections/)

In addition to the steady stream of customers generated by the vaccine schedule, pediatricians are given financial incentives per fully vaccinated child in their practice by insurance companies. (https://childrenshealthdefense.org/news/the-normalization-of-corruption-big-pharma-takes-tobacco-tactics-to-a-new-level/) Blue Cross Blue Shield Compensation and Bonus Program for pediatricians provided a $40 bonus to the pediatrician for every on-time vaccine up to $400 per child. A typical medical practice could include 1500 children which would be a half million dollar annual incentive to vaccinate according to the schedule and not to ask too many questions about safety. Even worse, the program punishes doctors who fail to fully vaccinate at least 63% of their practice on time. Those doctors lose 100% of the bonus.



The American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) benefits substantially from pharmaceutical industry advertisements in their affiliated medical journals, with advertising representing anywhere from a tenth to a third of the organization’s total revenues. The AAP receives funding from Merck, Pfizer, Sanofi, GSK and others. Considering its revenue from Big Pharma ads, it’s not surprising that AAP journal Pediatrics has led the way in promoting strategies to overcome “vaccine hesitancy” among parents: Parental refusal to vaccinate or their decision to “delay” and spread out the injections (to not give the child so many vaccines in a short window of time) are viewed as if they were manifestations of psychopathology, rather than informed rational choices (Children’s Health Defense, 2018, p.29).

The American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) benefits substantially from pharmaceutical industry advertisements in their affiliated medical journals, with advertising representing anywhere from a tenth to a third of the organization’s total revenues. The AAP receives funding from Merck, Pfizer, Sanofi, GSK and others.

Children’s Health Defense

The 1986 Law has revolutionized the pharmaceutical industry and the vaccine program. Big Pharma revenues from vaccines has grown from a $170 million industry in the early 1980s to $60 billion in 2019. (https://jbhandleyblog.com/home/2019/2/20/jb-handley-is-there-a-path-to-end-the-autism-epidemic). Thanks largely to no-liability-vaccines the pharmaceutical industry is now the most profitable industry in the U.S. In a single year in the early 2000s, “the combined profits of the ten largest drug companies in the Fortune 500 had higher net profits, of $35.9 billion more than all the other 490 companies [in the Fortune 500] combined. This translated into political power: “There are more full-time pharmaceutical industry lobbyists on Capitol Hill than there are legislators in both Houses of Congress” (Holland, 2010, p36).

The collusion of medical establishment, government, and Big Pharma in promoting vaccines is exactly what occurred after the passage of the 1986 NCVIA Act. The state stepped in to protect the private sector, then “regulatory” agencies were created that were in the vaccine business, and promoted vaccines. Doctors were co-opted. Since Pharma is allowed to advertise on television the media was co-opted. But what makes the Vaccine dogmas so impregnable, and transformed vaccine critics into a figure of derision in the public eye, even on the anti-corporate left, is the virtual consecration of vaccines as elixirs of “public health” by the press and the medical establishment––even as they make children sicker and sicker. “Vaccines cured small pox and polio”–this is part of the catechism many people will scream at you – if you express any doubt about the 72 injections children are given today.

Dr. Richard Moskowitz, pediatrician and author, writes, “Most doctors nevertheless continue to believe what the CDC tells them, that vaccines are uniformly safe and effective, even though the Supreme Court has ruled that they are inherently unsafe…. This, I submit, is not science, but scientism, a blind dogmatism and quasi-religious faith that whatever passes for science at the moment is the absolute truth, beyond question or doubt, to which everyone must pledge allegiance, the main result of which is to stifle the critical thinking, questioning, and doubting of seemingly settled truths that real science requires.” (https://www.ageofautism.com/2019/01/dr-richard-moskowitz-md-on-anti-vaxxers.html)

(To Be Contd. Part Two and Part Three of this article to follow shortly.)

The other references are in the article. I listed Blaylock here because his article is on multiple sites.

REFERENCES

Blaylock, R. (2008), “Vaccines, Neurodevelopment and Autism Spectrum Disorders: The Danger of Excessive Vaccination During Brain Development:The Case for a Link to Autism Spectrum Disorders” www.vaccinationinformationnetwork.com/vaccines-brain-development-and-autism-dr-russell-blaylock-md

Bruesewitz, R. (2012), “Justice Disserved: The Hannah Bruesewitz Odyssey” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Children’s Health Defense (2018), Conflicts of Interest Undermine Children’s Health, ebook, Children Health Defense.

Colbin, Annemarie (2012), “A Holistic Health Perspective,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY: Skyhorse Publishing.

Converse, Judy, (2012), “Sick is the New Healthy,” in L.K. Habakus and Mary Holland, Vaccine Epidemic, NY:Skyhorse Publishing.

Cowan, Thomas (2018), Vaccines, Autoimmunity and the Changing Nature of Childhood Illness, White River Junction Vt: Chelsea Green Publishing.

Fisher, Barbara Loe (2008), Vaccines, Autism & Chronic Inflammation: The New Epidemic Worthington, Ohio: P.B.Industries.

Fitts, Catherine Austin ( 2020), ”Special Solari Report: Vaccine Mandates with Mary Holland, J.D.” https://home.solari.com/special-solari-report-vaccine-mandates-with-mary-holland-j-d, February 25, 2020

Handley,J. B.(2018), How to End the Autism Epidemic,White River Junction, Vt:: Chelsea Green Publishing

Holland, Mary (2010), “Reconsidering Compulsory Childhood Vaccination,” Public Law Research Paper,No. 10-64, NY:New York University School of Law.

Humphries, Suzanne and Roman Bystrianyk, (2013), Dissolving Illusions:Disease, Vaccines, and The Forgotten History, New York, CreateSpace Publishers (https://www.amazon.com/Dissolving-Illusions-Disease-Vaccines-Forgotten-dp-1480216895/dp/1480216895/ref=mt_other?_encoding=UTF8&me=&qid=1600662412).

Klein, Naomi (2008), The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism, New York: Picador.

Moskowitz, Richard (2006), “How Do Vaccines Work,” Pathways to Family Wellness, Issue 10, June-July 2006.

Moskowitz, Richard (2009) “On Anti-vaxxers,” Age of Autism, Jan, 2019. https://www.ageofautism.com/2019/01/dr-richard-moskowitz-md-on-anti-vaxxers.html

Moskowitz, Richard (2017), Vaccines: A Reappaisal, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Proctor, Robert. (1999) The Nazi War on Cancer. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press..

Stoller,K.P. (2019), “The Denial of Adverse Event Risk Following Immunization and the Loss of Informed Consent – A Perspective, ” ACTA SCIENTIFIC PAEDIATRICS, Vol. 2 Issue 1 January 2019

Szasz, Thomas (2001),The Therapeutic State:The Tyranny of Pharmacracy, Volume V, Number 4, Spring 2001,Independent Review.

Wilcox, Brent (2018), Jabbed: How the Vaccine Industry, Medical Establishment, and Government Stick It to You and Your Family, New York: Skyhorse Publishing.

Whitaker, Robert (2011), Anatomy of an Epidemic: Magic Bullets, Psychiatric Drugs, and the Astonishing Rise of Mental Illness in America, New York: Broadway Books.

Justice Dead in Oregon as Judge McShane Upholds Kasubhai’s Unsubstantiated Ruling on Legal Scholar Todd Giffen as Mentally Incompetent

–Ramola D/Posted 7/11/2019

In a rather brief and opaque statement on June 28, 2019 titled an “Order” Judge Michael McShane of the US District Court of Oregon, demonstrating that Justice is quite visibly dead in Oregon upheld Judge Mustafa Kasubhai’s inexplicable and baseless decision finding Todd Giffen mentally incompetent, and ordered he be “restored to competency.”

Liberty weeps as we know, and Justice too

Stating he found no error, and the Review and Recommendation by Judge Kasubhai is correct, flying therefore in the face of all evidence to the contrary presented by Todd Giffen and his psychologist of many years, Dr. Seth Farber, as presented in Dr. Farber’s recent letter to Judge McShane, as well as investigative reports and declarations by this science-and-technology reporter on the reality of the military neurotechnologies Todd has reported being used on him non-consensually (and thereby establishing, for all educated Americans, including judges and lawyers who are not immune from literacy that mention of such neurotechnology does not constitute mental illness); and, additionally, several Declarations by supporters pointing out Todd is highly versed in legal matters and scarcely schizophrenic as Dr. Cynthia Low the court-appointed psychologist glibly stated after 2 hours with Todd and no evidence, Judge McShane essentially added to the blanket railroading of Todd Giffen’s case by several parties here and established that he too is a compromised judge unable to make an independent review of the actual facts. 

In doing so he has also upheld the deliberate, planned Obstruction-of-Justice moves by US Attorneys Billy Williams and Joseph Huynh to persuade Judge Kasubhai to find Todd incompetent despite his being acknowledgedly articulate in court, noted by Todd and reported here earlier:

Despite lengthy objections to Judge Kasubhai’s ruling carefully detailed by Todd Giffen and sent in to Judge McShane, Todd notes that this brief order suggests he has “refused to look at any case laws or material or even ask that any witnesses be called to testify.”

Todd Giffen

Primary among his objections was the fact that he was not permitted to call psychiatrists and psychologists of his own choosing for the previous hearing, thanks to negligence and stalling by his court-appointed attorney Lisa Ludwig: “Under 18 USC 3006A I was reading the case laws, it states ‘defendant has an absolute right to examination by independent psychiatric experts of his own choosing separate from the courts appointment of any experts..’ Yet no motions were filed on my behalf, nor anyone hired.”

At that May 23 hearing with Judge Kasubhai, the speculation that Lisa Ludwig was in fact working with the judge and US attorneys against Todd Giffen as a “double agent,” does not appear to analysts of this case as an idle one.

Todd notes:

“Only one witness was present; the government’s own, this was done to knock out from the record all my witnesses and doctors.

My attorney refused to hire any doctors or my private investigator solely to help the US attorney and judge create the record which would have no details about my abuse in custody, so I could be committed and the judge would not look like he was making any mistakes.

This was all rigged, and a set-up as Seth Farber and all my witnesses wrote letters supporting me. Lisa Ludwig was available in April and May to work on my case, but pretended she had no time.

The reality is she denied me a service on purpose, which is why no private doctors or experts were hired, and at the last minute, she moved to block having to subpoena anyone to make sure nothing contradicting Cynthia Low would be present.”

Further, while the US attorneys submitted a Memo to the judge fixating on Dr. Cynthia Low’s faulty assessment of Todd and seeking to discredit Dr. Seth Farber (as reported earlier), sudden stating of need for a “forensic psychologist” in court and Lisa Ludwig’s failure to support Dr. Farber in court also sought to exclude Dr. Farber.

“My attorney had him present, but excluded his testimony entirely and refused to let him speak, so they could make it look like they allowed him to be called to talk – but in reality, they would not let him talk or have any witnesses there to back him up.”

Dr. Farber  also had pointed this out to Lisa Ludwig in his letter to her:

Excerpt/Dr. Seth Farber’s Letter to Lisa Ludwig, full letter here: Collusion, Conspiracy, and Sabotage…

Most egregious about the current ruling by McShane is his blanket dropping of the case and refusal to hold a rehearing, despite grave violations of judicial process and defendant’s rights. 

“…I looked up the case laws for 18 USC 3006 and I found out I have a right to hire my own independent psychiatrist regardless of what the court thinks.

United States v Bass (1973, CA9 Cal) 477 F.2d 723

Defendant with history of mental illness whose competency and sanity had already been evaluated by two court appointed psychiatrists, has right to hire his own psychiatrists of choosing under 18 USC 3006A.

United States v Pete (2016, CA9 Ariz) 819 F.3d 1121

District Court abused its discretion in declining to appoint neuropsychological expert to aid defense because (1) reasonably competent attorney would have found services of requested expert necessary to provide adequate representations; and (2) defendant was prejudiced by not having access to expert he requested because defendant requested expert services is furtherance of claim that would have, if meritorious, changed outcome of case.

So essentially McShane was required to heed my requests for additional doctor evaluations in my objections because defendant has an absolute right to be evaluated by his own chosen psychiatrist. The appeals court would deem my objections to the magistrate’s findings as making timely requests to be evaluated by my own doctor, because McShane had not yet adopted or made any decision about my competency yet, but I was allowed under 20 USC 646(b)(1) to submit new evidence and have a rehearing to do so.”

Notice must also be made of Judge Kasubhai’s lengthy and spurious narratives in his Review and Recommendations where he demanded Todd be seen as incompetent by his order and be “restored to competency” by the court’s willing henchmen aka psychiatrists, which Todd spent several pages refuting, and which this writer intends shortly to dissect and address in closer detail. 

One aspect of this missive can be commented on here, the intention throughout to shore up this manufactured notion of “incompetency” by projecting Todd as a manic and uncontrollable person given to outbursts, imagining covert government assaults, and therefore clearly delusional and incompetent:

Excerpt/Case No.: 6:18-mj-00236-MK, Document 67, REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION

Todd’s own recounting of his calling out in court at that Dec 5 hearing when his then-court-appointed attorney was Todd Bofferding, was reported earlier:

By all counts, Todd Giffen has been the victim of intense discrimination in the Oregon District Courts, and appears to be being held unlawfully in prison (for nine months) by way of a collusive mechanism involving corrupt lawyers and judges, US attorneys and court-appointed psychologists all keen to protect non-consensual military and Intelligence neurotechnology experimentation being conducted unlawfully on hundreds of thousands if not millions of people inside USA and also abroad, worldwide—which this reporter once more reported to President Trump this Fourth of July week, as reports of horrific invasion of bodily and brain privacy, absolute torture, and grave human rights violations pour in from Americans all over the US and worldwide. (Please see the many video interviews with reporting survivors at Ramola D Reports on Youtube, and print interviews and articles at The Everyday Concerned Citizen for evidence of such reports, including highly significant interviews with NSA, CIA, and FBI whistleblowers on matters of Surveillance abuses and non-consensual Neurotech/DEW use on Americans.)

Basic investigative journalism establishes without a doubt that the kind of invasive brain assaults Todd Giffen reports are being reported also by thousands of others, testified to as ongoing by military/Intelligence whistleblowers including Dr. James Giordiano and Dr. Robert Duncan, and indicated as plausible by several declassified documents reporting the studied bio-effects of non-lethal weapons which include microwave technologies.

Spectrum weapons-testing contracts running Directed Energy Bio-Behavioral research programs and sensing & tracking air/ground systems communications are currently being run nationwide by the US Airforce, Air Force Research Laboratory, US Marine Corps, and other agencies through Defense contractors like General Dynamics and Lockheed Martin.

Anti-personnel neuro-surveillance technologies are being tested by the National Institute of Justice, as per a Memorandum of Understanding in 1994 between DOD and DOJ and their own annual reports; and psychotronic/neuroweapon use by local Law Enforcement is being contemplated openly by a police chief in California, who reports, as does Dr. Giordiano, that these matters are being studied academically by the Department of Justice.

Does the Department of Justice, the FBI, and the Attorney-General imagine their current secretive use of these neurotechnologies and anti-personnel “non-lethal-weapons” also putatively hidden in documents as enhanced surveillance, biometric surveillance, surveillance devices, electronic surveillance, crime prevention, and advanced technology on Americans, non-consensually and intrusively and inhumanely, is going to be kept hidden forever?

But perhaps the real truth here is that these agencies, as also the CIA, NSA, and Department of Defense know very well that what is being reported by Americans is true, and fear the avalanche of culpability and retribution headed their way once the extent of their criminality in wreaking absolute torture and bodily/brain invasion on their unconsenting and impotent victims is fully known to the American public, and prompts the full exposure and shut-down of all their Classified-to-Conceal-Crime “brain research” National-Security-lie programs–which appear to have transcended MK ULTRA in criminality currently, or at least, as much as has surfaced of those 1970s Church Committee findings on MK ULTRA.

Hence the shutting-down of any possibility for justice in the judicial system, and hence this absolute control of judges and attorneys, who are willing to sound delirious with stupidity in their pronouncements of orders which fly in the face of all reason, and unashamedly inflict further criminal violations of human rights and outright political persecution hand-in-hand with criminally unethical psychiatry in the attempt to “restore to competency” a quite mentally sound and competent reporter of their crimes.

Matters of collusion, conspiracy, and sabotage have been extensively detailed in this article which includes letters and complaints sent to Lisa Ludwig, Todd Giffen’s attorney and Judge McShane by Dr. Seth Farber and this reporter as well as Todd’s own analyses from his jail cell in Sheri­dan, Oregon:

Collusion, Conspiracy, and Sabotage Blatant in Todd Giffen’s Case by Federal District Court Judge Mustafa Kasubhai, US Attorneys, Defense Attorney Lisa Ludwig

Todd Giffen is currently researching options wherein he can appeal this second lax finding by Judge McShane, find a private attorney willing to take on his case, and is intending to sue Lisa Ludwig for essentially operating as a double agent on behalf of the US Government and helping to lose his defense by failure to provide assistance of counsel, interference with his “compulsory process clause rights,” “deliberate indifference/reckless indifference to Due Process,” refusing to call witnesses and private doctors he called for, while also failing to procure him basic medical care and protect him from harm in custody.

Related

Collusion, Conspiracy, and Sabotage Blatant in Todd Giffen’s Case by Federal District Court Judge Mustafa Kasubhai, US Attorneys, Defense Attorney Lisa Ludwig

Unconventional Journalism in the Face of Unconventional Warfare: Is Fear of Deep State Crimes Surfacing Driving the Oregon Public Defender Sabotage of Todd Giffen’s Case? | May 23, 2019

Open Travesty of Justice at Todd Giffen’s Mental Competency Hearing May 23, 2019

Todd Giffen: Scholar, Researcher, Activist, Whistleblower, Targeted Victim of Government and Police Crimes

Investigative Reporter Statement by Ramola D for Todd Giffen

Todd Giffen, Whistleblower on Non-Consensual Govt. Neuro-Experimentation Held on Charges of Interstate Threat & Stalking (After Messages Sent to Senators) Reports Serious Statutory Violations in Extended Jail Stay, Unsafe Jail Conditions, Attorney Failings, and Wrongful Mental Competency Evaluation

Related Published Court Documents

Review and Recommendation, Competency May 28, 2019, Judge Kasubhai

McShane Order for Restorative tx June 28 2019, Judge McShane

 

Collusion, Conspiracy, and Sabotage Blatant in Todd Giffen’s Case by Federal District Court Judge Mustafa Kasubhai, US Attorneys, Defense Attorney Lisa Ludwig

–Ramola D/Posted 6/10/2019/Updated 6/11/2019

Following on the absurd finding of “mental incompetence” by Judge Mustafa Kasubhai in the case of Todd Giffen on May 23, 2019, reported here earlier, Dr. Seth Farber and this writer both wrote to his appointed defense attorney Lisa Ludwig, urging her to step forward to defend Todd adequately and file motions of appeal and reconsideration of his wrongfully-arrived at determination, and asking for her response. Which was not forthcoming, since Lisa Ludwig seems to have established a habit of refusal to acknowledge emails and phone calls, even from expert witness Dr. Seth Farber, whose testimonial at the court hearing she prevented from being aired and did not support.

Both letters are shared below, followed by excerpts from Todd’s own communications from Oregon’s Sheridan Jail on Corrlinks addressing the rather major factor of Lisa Ludwig’s lack of responsiveness and support in her supposed defense of Todd, much in line with the previous defense attorney Todd Bofferding’s words and actions against him, which got him fired for incompetence. Judge Mustafa prevented Todd from firing Lisa Ludwig, who  asked to be released from the case at the end of the court hearing and was asked to stay on, apparently in name only since she informed Todd Giffen she would not be filing appeals and motions for dismissal to assist him. Judge Kasubhai added to this betrayal by informing Todd he could not file any motions of appeal himself.

Currently however it appears that appeals filed earlier at the 9th Circuit Court of Appeals have come through, after a long delay. From Todd, on the matter of appeals and the Writ of Mandamus he has filed:

“Typically an interlocutory appeal only takes 4 months, meaning by March or April we would have had a decision on the Dec 5th and Nov 5th orders. Todd Bofferding, Lisa Ludwig, and Judge Mustafa are all involved…. Now my appeals are finally being heard by Judge McShane- but he should have heard them back in December or January when I filed my own pro se appeals because Todd Bofferding, illegally, wouldn’t do it. The case law states an attorney cannot refuse to file an appeal when ordered by the client. Lisa Ludwig got involved in this by trying to get Mustafa to agree she didn’t have to file my appeals May 23. They love to delay and stall people filing appeals big time.”

The Nov 5th and December 5th hearings he refers to were those held shortly after his arrest when the US attorneys suggested he be evaluated for mental competency; these hearings and the background of Todd’s case were covered here earlier. It is important to note throughout that while the FBI, on US Capitol Police intimations arrested Todd last November on charges of “interstate threats and communications” in emails sent last July and August to US Senators, the language in those emails while carrying graphic imagery do not extend threats of violence as mis-characterized by the FBI in their warrant, but promise retribution via a jury trial culminating in an imagined death penalty for their inaction (Senators Wyden and Defazio) in the face of repeated appeals for help while he was being abused as a vulnerable person and non-consensual experimentee with radiation weapons, DEWs, and mind invasion neuroweaponry. That Todd is not in any way violent nor likely to be has been repeatedly stressed by his long time psychologist, Dr. Seth Farber.

Todd notes that all the attorneys assigned to him have been failing him one by one, starting with Kimberly Seymour, then Todd Bofferding, now Lisa Ludwig:

“So I originally ordered Todd Bofferding and Kimberly Seymour to file my appeals back in Nov, and Dec 5th. Todd Bofferding refused a direct order to file my appeals. (The case of) Sandoval-Lopez says an attorney cannot do that, or if they do, client is allowed to file pro se late. So Judge Mustafa refused to let me file mine–that’s why I had to go do a Writ of Mandamus.”

“The court of appeals told me to file a Writ of Mandamus. When I told Mustafa about what the appeals court said and (brought up) the case law (in court), he tried to cover up his wrong by lying in court saying he had no idea he received appeals. But Kelly luckily recorded his clerks on the phone saying they received the notice of appeals, and they were sent to Mustafa for review. He filed them way late in April. But why the appeals were really late is: Todd Bofferding was supposed to do it within 14 days or so of the judge’s decision Dec 5th and he knew that.”

Regarding Lisa Ludwig’s refusal to file appeals, Todd points out these are illegal abuses and defense counsel is required to file appeals: “On the record May 23, both she and Judge Mustafa said “there will be no appeals.'” But the US Supreme Court ruled long ago defense counsel was banned from refusing to file appeals and had to consult with clients to ask if they wanted an appeal done, and in cases where an appeal is prudent, mandatorily had to do it even without consulting with client.”

Having learned through Kelly Wallace’s investigative reportage that Judge Michael McShane oversees Judge Mustafa, this writer sent on to Judge McShane the complaint sent originally to the Oregon Commission about the blatant violations of judicial process in the competency court hearing, also included below. Dr. Seth Farber sent a letter as well at the same time protesting the violations of judicial process  by Judge Kasubhai and attorney Lisa Ludwig at the May 23 hearing  to Judge McShane, also included below. Todd has sent on to Judge McShane objections to the magistrate’s findings as well asking that Dr. Cynthia Low’s questionable evaluation be struck from the record, that he be evaluated by psychologists of his own choosing, provided medical care for his infections, and be released from custody immediately.

Excerpt: “The government has already covered up my health, inflicted injuries, denied me medical care for over 6 months, and this will continue.

6. The Due Process liberty standard under O’Connor v Donaldson requiring something more than just mental illness, such as dangerousness for commitment should prevail to protect citizens from slaughter in psychiatric facilities.

As Judge McShane is handling the review of the Nov and December orders now, and I want all other orders reviewed by Mustafa, he should nix the in-custody competency evaluation, thus nixing Cynthia Low’s report, and make proper findings that an outpatient examination should be ordered, and I should be released from custody immediately.”

Letter from Dr. Seth Farber Sent By Email to Lisa Ludwig, Todd Giffen’s appointed attorney, after the May 23, 2019 Mental Competency Hearing

5/26/2019 at 2:40 AM

Seth Farber, PhD

NYC

Dear Ms. Ludwig,

It seems to me that your negligence in Todd Giffen’s case has been so egregious as to constitute malpractice.

I do not know whether the law states only forensic psychologists/psychiatrists can give opinion on defendants’ “competence.” (Rule 72 does not state that.) Jim Gottstein, Esq., a renowned lawyer in his own field (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/James_Gottstein), did not think it did. Todd Giffen said it was an abuse of judicial discretion.

But the government attorney claimed that only forensic psychologists can assess competence and the judge did not permit either Ron Unger or myself to give an opinion as to Todd’s competence. If you knew this to be the case what was the point of our testimony?The only expert opinion that the Court heard was Dr. Low’s—and thus the judge had to base his ruling on her opinion.I had no idea I would not be permitted to say Todd was competent. It was your responsibility to find Todd a forensic psychologist who could give the judge another opinion. But you made no effort to do that. This is negligence.

If the judge was wrong and expert witnesses do not need certification in “forensics” to assess competence, why did you not object ? I checked with Todd–you did not object once..So Ms. Ludwig, either way you failed to represent Todd adequately. Either you should have gotten a forensic psychologist for Todd, or you should have repeatedly objected to the judge’s refusal to allow Mr Unger or me to opine on Todd’s competency.

Your own negligence was also evinced in the fact that I was given 10 minutes by you and Dr. Low spoke for over an hour.

It is ludicrous that a defendant who is a high-school dropout who knows the law better than many lawyers,who did not miss one word spoken in the Court, who submitted numerous motions to the Court and wrote his own habeus corpus petition, who probably has an IQ well over 135, is considered incompetent to understand the charges against him! This was an easy battle for you to win–had you cared, Ms. Ludwig. It seems like you don’t give a damn.

Clearly Dr. Low’s prejudice against the defendant, either for his “extreme” political views or his “mental disability,” prevented her from giving an objective assessment of Todd’s competence! And since you represented Mr. Ivers in 2018, you know a defendant can be “delusional” and competent.

Had you given me time I would have explained that to the Court. In NY that principle is codified in Rivers v. Katz.

Now you refuse to do anything more for Todd, even though the judge instructed you to comply with his requests. You should have filed on last Friday a motion for review by District Court judge and a motion for reconsideration. Please do it Monday. You should get Todd an expert witness who is allowed to testify on his competence.

Dr Peter Breggin is the only witness with forensic credentials who can explain to the Court why Dr. Low’s evaluation lacks scientific validity. This is necessary since she has misled and confused the Court,.

Please do your job or Todd’s supporters will be forced to take other legal measures.

Sincerely

Seth Farber, PhD

Letter from Ramola D Sent By Email to Lisa Ludwig, Todd Giffen’s appointed attorney, after the May 23, 2019 Mental Competency Hearing

Todd requires counsel to act on his behalf

From Ramola D <ramolad@hushmail.com>

To Lisa Ludwig <lisa@l2r2law.com>

Sent Saturday, May 25, 2019 at 12:52 PM

Dear Lisa Ludwig,

Like everyone else I am pretty horrified at the judge’s ruling that Todd Giffen is in his view mentally incompetent, and needs to be restored to competency.

Dr. Farber has reported that his evaluation and testimonial as to Todd’s competency and intellectual acumen was neither permitted nor accepted, his one remark regarding Todd being competent was objected to and struck off the record, with his defense counsel not objecting to this objection and strike-off.

It is also clear that Dr. Low’s faulty evaluation was the one that was let stand.

The situation points to malpractice on the part of many players, including the judge.

Todd’s counsel is required to speak and act on his behalf, to help him establish mental competency — which none of us can see as being in any doubt — in order to move forward to a jury trial where he can defend himself suitably.

I ask therefore that you kindly file motion for reconsideration of this judge’s wrongful decision immediately, so that it can be properly appealed. Anything less will comprise an abandonment of Todd’s defense, in my view.

In the past, when I have emailed you my Investigative Reporter’s Statement for Todd Giffen and my Declaration by Ramola D in Support of Mental Competence of Todd Giffen, you have neither acknowledged my emails nor affirmed that my statements and declaration were filed in the court and provided to the judge. You have also prevented me from testifying in court at this hearing, although your PI Maraed Walsh asked me to testify on Todd’s request and I agreed.

I request that you kindly acknowledge this email and let me know immediately your response to this urgent request to stand up for Todd, to truly act as his defense lawyer, to act for him and to appeal this reckless ruling by Judge Mustafa with its train of dire consequences impending.

I understand there is high urgency in terms of when this motion should be filed, and when immediate arrangements are made to ensure adequate evaluation, hopefully by Dr. Breggin, that can be used in court, so please let me know immediately your response.

Thanks very much.

Sincerely,

Ramola D

**********************************************************

Ramola D

Investigative Sci-Tech Journalist | Writer | Poet | Educator | Activist

Editor & Publisher, The Everyday Concerned Citizen

Reporter, Ramola D Reports on Youtube, Vimeo, Bitchute

Twitter: @EccEveryday

Facebook: Ramola Dharmaraj

Complaint (by Ramola D) about Federal District Court Judge Mustafa Kasubhai: Violations of Judicial Process in the May 23, 2019 Hearing and Faulty Ruling of Mental Incompetence of Todd Giffen

Date: June 3, 2019

Dear Judge McShane:

I submitted the following complaint to the Commission on Judicial Fitness and Disability last week but was advised it is not within their jurisdiction to attend to matters concerning federal district court judges, so on the advice of a friend who called in to your offices on Friday, suggesting you are the right person to send this to, I am sending this complaint to you, to apprise you of this matter, which is an urgent and extremely important matter regarding wrongful judgement in the case of Todd Giffen, whose case I have been reporting on as an investigative journalist since I learned of his arrest, some months ago—and requesting that you take immediate action to stop this wrongful judgment from going forward. Great harm may be done by the US District Court system, unwittingly, to Todd Giffen if this matter is not attended to immediately. I will send as well my Declaration in Support of Mental Competency of Todd Giffen and Investigative Reporter Statement for Todd Giffen, for your review.

Complaint sent to judicial.fitness@oregon.gov,

Thursday, May 30, 2019 at 3:27 PM

My name is Ramola D/Dharmaraj…witness to Todd Giffen, Case Number 6:18-mj-236-MK and this is about his court hearing on May 23, 2019 where Judge Mustafa Kasubhai of Eugene, Oregon in the Federal District Court declared him mentally incompetent after a prejudiced hearing.

This is the gist of my complaint:

Judge Kasubhai has violated basic judicial process in the case of Todd Giffen by prematurely naming him mentally incompetent after a highly prejudiced and one-sided court hearing on May 23, 2019:

1) by, in court, not permitting Dr. Seth Farber, Todd Giffen’s psychologist who has spoken often to Todd and evaluated him before, to present evidence or discussion and analysis on Todd Giffen’s mental competency;

2) by, in court, sustaining an objection from the prosecutors on Dr. Farber’s own voiced assessment of clear mental competency, and in fact striking from the record Dr. Farber’s comment implying that Todd is mentally competent;

3) by, in court, giving Dr. Farber, Todd’s expert witness only 10 minutes to speak while the court-assigned psychologist was given 90 minutes;

4) by, in court, not including the evidence sent to him in an Investigative Report and in a Declaration by Investigative Science and Technology Reporter and Journalist Ramola D/Dharmaraj who has covered the subject of non-consensual government experimentation with anti-personnel radiation weaponry and neuro-monitoring neurotechnology for several years, a matter acutely relevant to Todd’s case since he claims being subject to same, a matter quite plausible given the historic and whistleblowing evidence of these technologies currently being tested on Americans, as per declassified documents, the words of military and University scientists, patents, and other reports;

5) without, earlier, first giving him a proper chance to be evaluated by his own clinical psychologist for many years but assigning a random psychologist Dr. Cynthia Low to examine him, which she did over a scant two hours, making use of previous records to write a report that is faulty in its conclusions, based as it is on inadequate information;

6) by, in court, suddenly making it a requirement that the examining psychologist needs to be “forensic” — an unheard-of requirement, never before aired in any other court case; On this matter, the fully mentally competent Todd Giffen writes:

My attorney was not thorough or prepared for a competency hearing May 23, 2019. She did not hire a forensic psychologist or psychiatrist to do an evaluation, get a report, and have the forensic doctor testify, for my defense.

The attorney and Judge did not notify me, or my expert witnesses, that a forensic doctor was required to testify on competency.

The attorney was given a list of my expert witnesses. Dr. Peter Breggin is a forensic psychiatrist, who is willing to testify and evaluate me, if he gets paid for his time. He told the attorney he was not available on May 23rd, but another date would be ok.”

7) by failing to ensure that the defendant, who is too poor to afford his own counsel, and is a reporting victim of much past abuse at the hands of police, hospital staff at Oregon State Hospital, and covered agencies of the government, was provided competent counsel: Lisa Ludwig has established she is not competent counsel, has failed to call Todd’s witnesses over two months, failed to ensure proper psychological evaluation, failed to provide him medical help when he needed it, and failed to abide by the judge’s ruling May 1 to get Todd the medical help he needed and a letter for the Marshalls to ensure it, and failed to communicate either with Todd or his supporters in a timely way. (Further, in court on May 23, this lawyer, Lisa Ludwig has stated she will not file motions to appeal or reconsider the judge’s decision, showing she and the judge are working similarly against the best interests of this defendant, who is therefore being discriminated against intensely by the court.)

In a letter, Todd Giffen writes:

“My attorney neglected my legal rights, causing vulnerable persons’ abuse and prejudice to my rights.

Main Case Law: United States v Gillenwater, 717 F.3d 1070, 1080 – states that a defendant must speak up if his lawyer or judge is abusing him, otherwise he loses the right to call witnesses or testify.

Under “18 USC 4247(d).” Under 4247(d) it says, “you shall be represented by counsel (it is not optional), shall be afforded opportunity to testify, subpoena and call witnesses, cross examine, and present evidence by proffer or otherwise.”

Case Law United States v. Sandoval-Lopez 409 F.3d 1193. The case law states “a defense counsel cannot refuse to file an appeal, reconsideration, or objections to magistrates’ findings” at order of their client, and they must file these things when it seems prudent to do so even if the client does not order it be done. If the attorney refuses to do it or failed to, the defendant may file pro se, against the attorney’s will, and even file late because it was the attorney’s job to do it. It is always ineffective assistance of counsel for an attorney to refuse to appeal, or to fail to when it was prudent to.

I have a right to object the Judges’ decision and file an appeal and other motions for reconsideration. The attorney told the Judge, she is not willing to file my appeal or motions as her obligation.”

8) by then ordering that the defendant could not any further file his motions pro se, or send his motions for others to file, the judge has effectively tied him unlawfully to incompetent counsel, a fraudulent ruling based on judicious malpractice, wrongful actions to exclude important expert witness testimonial, and cut off all avenues for him to appeal any of this himself.

9) by earlier seeming to work with the incompetent counsel to ask for case law to deem an articulate defendant incompetent: Todd Giffen writes:

“March 20, 2019 the Judge stated at the hearing, and on transcript record, that I was intelligent and can communicate effectively.

May 1, 2019, the Judge said my thoughts were focused and I was communicating well, and that the attorney for the government better have a good reason to show on May 23, that I was incompetent. He told the government attorney that they need a case law on an articulate person who was found incompetent. Why would the judge try to help the government attorney on case law and tell them what they need, to find me incompetent?

I believe the case has been one sided, which is illegal. The Judge is being unlawful and violating my civil rights. The statements by the Judge, about my intelligence and in communicating, clearly shows that he knows I’m competent and fit to stand trial.”

As a consequence, Todd Giffen, perfectly mentally competent–which requires awareness of legal and court procedures, and cognizance and assistance in one’s own defense, which he has demonstrated daily at expert-level throughout his incarceration–has been wrongfully and fraudulently named mentally incompetent by the irresponsible words and actions of this judge, and is in danger of being wrongfully psychiatrically committed and force-drugged for 4 months, all of which are both fraudulent and great crimes against humanity.

The faulty rulings of this judge in violation of basic judicial process and in encroachment and discrimination of the defendant’s basic rights to an unprejudiced hearing should be condemned and rescinded and this judge removed from the Bench. A fair hearing should be set up in its place, with Dr. Farber, Todd’s chief witness, being permitted to fully speak his mind and share his knowledge on Todd’s Mental Competency to stand trial, which he stands ready to do, with a new Judge, one who does not exhibit incompetence and prejudice, and with, if needed, a forensic psychologist whom Todd GIffen approves, Dr. Peter Breggin, who has already indicated he will testify if given enough lead time for court, and with new counsel who can indeed be expected to act on the defendant’s behalf properly.

It is a crime against humanity to name a mentally competent person incompetent, and thereby remove his civil and human rights and force him into a mental institution and fill him up with deadly neurotoxic drugs. It is lack of discernment and judgment to permit incompetent counsel like Lisa Ludwig to act as defense in any case when her failings are glaring and she has been complained about before by the defendant. This judge should be removed and this ruling dissolved immediately.

Thank you for your attention and do not fail to approach me for further information. My contact information is below. I enclose the Declaration I submitted to the judge for this hearing, which supports the information Todd Giffen is reporting; kindly be aware that as an investigative journalist, what I am researching and reporting overrides the faulty speculations of Dr. Cynthia Low, the court psychologist, of non-consensual government neuro-experimentation (this being the right terminology, not “Govt mind control” as prosecuting attorneys labeled it) being factual truth as we have it currently, from military insider sources, cited in my Declaration, and that therefore people reporting it, including Todd Giffen, cannot be deemed “delusional” as she suggests when they do; these are people who should be helped and supported, and not victimized further with faulty mental health assessments and destructive judgements.

Sincerely,

Ramola D

****************************************************************************

Ramola D

Investigative Sci-Tech Journalist | Writer | Poet | Educator | Activist

Editor & Publisher, The Everyday Concerned Citizen

Ramola D Reports on Youtube, Vimeo, Bitchute

Twitter: @EccEveryday

Facebook: Ramola Dharmaraj

Letter from Dr. Seth Farber to Judge McShane on Todd Giffen’s Mental Competency Hearing with Judge Kasubhai

Seth Farber, Ph.D.
http://www.sethHfarber.com
June 2, 2019

To the Honorable Judge McShane,

I am writing to urge you to review REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATIONS,May 28, 2019 Re Todd Giffen, Case No.: 6:18-mj-00236-MK by Judge Kasubhai. I testified at Mr Giffen’s competency hearing. I was misled by Ms. Ludwig and told I’d be qualified as an expert witness.

I received my doctorate in psychology from the California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. I have had 5 books published, and numerous articles and I am an editor of the scholarly journal, The Journal of Mind and Behavior. I have practiced psychotherapy for over 30 years.

I think the document, REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATIONS, May 28, 2019 Re Todd Giffen, Case No.: 6:18-mj-00236-MK by Judge Kasubhai, validates the claim I made in my letter (enclosed) to Mr Giffen’s lawyer, Lisa Ludwig: Todd Giffen was discouraged from procuring a mental health professional recognized as an expert by the Court to testify that he was competent.

In fact, Todd Giffen was deceived, wittingly or unwittingly, by his lawyer — and by Judge Kasubhai? He was told by Ms. Ludwig (as I was told) that the Court would recognize his psychotherapist (me) and Ron Unger, LCSW (a psychotherapist of Todd’s 4 years ago) as experts and would take our testimony into consideration.

The fact that Ron Unger and I were allowed to testify but not allowed to state an opinion as to Todd’s competency and the fact that neither of us was even mentioned in the Judge’s recommendations while Dr. Low’s report was taken as gospel means that Todd was denied his constitutional right to call expert witnesses.

Had he been told that my testimony and Mr. Unger’s testimony would be discounted by the Court (because we were not “forensic” psychologists), he would have demanded his right to be examined by an expert who would be recognized by the Court. But he was told and I was told the opposite by Ms. Ludwig who implied the judge had made the decision to recognize me as expert despite the Government’s objection.

I have testified over 40 times in Court in NY as a qualified expert witness. In most of those cases I spoke in opposition to a report by a Court-appointed psychologist recognized as an expert who concluded the respondent had “mental illness” that allegedly made him “incompetent” to be a parent. In none of those occasions were
the experts credentialled in “forensic psychology.”

It was and is my opinion after reading her report that Dr. Low was so biased against the defendant that she was unable to objectively assess his competency. I believe she was biased against Todd because of his “extremist” political views and because of his putative mental illness. The best way to determine whether Mr. Giffen understood the charges against him and the consequences would have been to ask him. This was never done. Nor was an effort made to assess his intellectual abilities.

Instead, Dr Low wrote page after page about his unstable childhood and his misdeeds as a troubled youth. This material is prejudicial and not probative. What does his troubled youth have to do with his competency now? Nor did Dr. Low even look at the motions Tod filed or his Habeus Corpus petition he wrote (without assistance) — that gives some idea of whether he has the capacity to understand the charges against him. These materials evince a person of far-above average intelligence who far surpasses the minimum requirement for competence. (This issue is independent of whether Mr Giffen is “delusional.” I have testified for several clients who were “delusional” and competent. As US vs. Ivers indicates, the Court recognizes they are not the same.)

Todd was examined only by Dr. Low. He was misled into believing that Mr.Unger and I would be permitted to present our opinions. Once he was told the Court would allow us to testify in Court, he assumed our testimony would have some weight, as did we. We are not even mentioned in the document written by Judge Kasubhai. We were all misled. Had Todd known our testimony was purely for show, he would have demanded the right to be examined by a “forensic psychologist” of his own choosing. I have no doubt that an unbiased psychologist would have found Todd competent.

Sincerely,
Seth Farber, Ph.D.

RELATED:

Todd Giffen: Scholar, Researcher, Activist, Whistleblower, Targeted Victim of Government and Police Crimes

Todd Giffen, Whistleblower on Non-Consensual Govt. Neuro-Experimentation Held on Charges of Interstate Threat & Stalking (After Messages Sent to Senators) Reports Serious Statutory Violations in Extended Jail Stay, Unsafe Jail Conditions, Attorney Failings, and Wrongful Mental Competency Evaluation

Unconventional Journalism in the Face of Unconventional Warfare: An Update on Todd Giffen | May 23, 2019

Petition by Kelly Wallace Seeking the Release of Todd Giffen with 293 signatories

Investigative Reporter Statement by Ramola D for Todd Giffen

Declaration by Ramola D in Support of Mental Competence of Todd Giffen

 

Todd Giffen, Whistleblower on Non-Consensual Govt. Neuro-Experimentation Held on Charges of Interstate Threat & Stalking (After Messages Sent to Senators) Reports Serious Statutory Violations in Extended Jail Stay, Unsafe Jail Conditions, Attorney Failings, and Wrongful Mental Competency Evaluation

–Ramola D/Posted 4/6/2019

Todd Giffen

Todd Giffen, whistleblower and human rights advocate who has raised needed public awareness on extrajudicial anti-personnel “non-lethal” Spectrum weapon targeting responsible for the abuses of “Targeted Individuals,” as well as on crimes of non-consensual neuro-experimentation being conducted covertly today by US Military and US Intelligence agencies as well as hospitals, and reporting non-consensual victim himself of such criminal abuse, is currently being held in Polk County Jail in Oregon with a court date set for April 8, 2019, having been moved there from Multinomah Jail rather abruptly, it seems, all in the space of a few days after being moved up from the Southern Nevada Law Center, a private immigration detention facility owned by the private corporation Core Civic Tennessee—recently evicted from Indianapolis on grounds of corruption–where he had been moved by US Marshalls after a 4-month long incarceration in Seattle at the Federal Bureau of Prisons, Seatac.

Kelly Wallace, human rights advocate and friend of Todd who learned of his incarceration a few weeks ago has been keeping the public informed about these events, noting in a recent round-table podcast at Ramola D Reports with Eric Jones of Courtroom Watch, Dr. Seth Farber, renowned psychologist and author and Todd’s psychologist, and Chris of Las Vegas, a former Law Enforcement officer from Nevada well-versed in both Law and Language, that the language used in Todd’s emails, while certainly on the questionable side, reflects his long frustration at being unable to persuade his representatives and Senators into taking positive action to stop the abuse and experimentation he has been reporting. One of the words discussed on this podcast was the word “rape” since Todd had penned language seemingly intending rape; Dr. Farber noted this language was used metaphorically, and Chris noted that it was an expression perhaps of frustration at government micreancy and corruption, a sentiment not unfamiliar to most in the US today. An earlier broadcast reported news of his arrest and incarceration (both videos below).

Arrest on Charges of Making Threats via Interstate Communications and Stalking

Todd reports that he was arrested by the FBI on his way from Oregon to the Million Mask March in Washington DC last fall on November 2 when he stepped off an Amtrak train in Chicago, and was transported back to Oregon. The criminal charge and affidavit document filed by Special Agent Damara Schlitz for the FBI states that he has been charged with making interstate threats via communications and stalking of the Senators and Representatives he wrote to via Facebook Messenger and email.

Piecing together what the FBI affidavit details and Todd’s own information, it appears that notice of Todd’s messages from July and August 2018 had been sent to the FBI after the messages were apprehended by US Capitol Police, with a couple sent to the Capitol Police Threat Assessment team by Congressman Peter DeFazio’s and Senator Ron Wyden’s offices, to whom they had been sent.

The criminal complaint and FBI affidavit citing some of the messages are public documents retrieved by Psych Rights from the PACER filing system and can be viewed here.

Unusual Statutory Violations: No Bail Hearing, Defendants’ Rights Ignored in Mental Competency Evaluation

It must be noted that Todd Giffen is a self-taught scholar of US Law and has a deep enough understanding of statutes, previous case law, and his Constitutional and civil rights that he is able to cogently advocate for himself in emails, letters, and filings—as this reporter has learned, perusing his emails and information sent over several days in March using CorrLinks, the email system set up by the Federal Bureau of Prisons to permit the incarcerated to exchange emails online.

Several statutory violations have occurred, Todd notes, as well as breaches in attorney-client relationship where his attorney has failed to advocate for him or assist him in filing appeals or calling expert witnesses to help establish his mental competency. He has been held without bail or a bail/detention hearing for 150 days in Seatac, and reports discrepancies in procedure in that a mental competency evaluation was ordered by the judge at a hearing on December 5, 2018, despite there being no preceding bail or detention hearing as required (his attorney disputes this, saying it is perfectly legal); the bail hearing that day was waived by his attorney; and this competency evaluation was commenced only late in his stay, beyond the time allotted legally for such evaluation, and constituted a scant 2-hour evaluation by a court-appointed psychologist over two days in late February which then yielded a report on March 11 pronouncing Todd incompetent and schizophrenic.

The Importance of Mental Competency and Implications of Incompetency

Much revolves around this issue of mental competency, which essentially points to a defendant’s ability to understand the legal process and assist his counsel with the defense of his case, and according to Criminal Defense attorney Chris Morales, is usually initiated by the defense attorney expressing doubts about the competency of his client to the judge. In a conversation with Kelly Wallace around the time of the March 11 report release, Mr. Bofferding, Todd’s attorney, informed her that were he found competent he could move ahead to a jury trial, but were he not, he would be sent to a psychiatric facility for four months to “restore” his competency with forced psychiatric drugging. If he refused drugs, he would be brought back to court for issuance of forced psychiatric-drugging via injections. This horrifying scenario is apparently the norm in the US and general Western criminal justice systems. According to MentalCompetency.org, “An estimated 60,000 competency evaluations are court-ordered each year. Approximately 20 percent of these evaluations lead to findings of incompetence—roughly 12,000 defendants are found incompetent to stand trial in the United States each year.”

Being pronounced incompetent—and needing to be “restored to competency”–also suggests that defendants are prevented from defending themselves immediately and subject to long psychiatric-facility or prison stay, to the clear benefit of the pharmaceutical industry, the hospital industry, and the prison industry.

Irregularities in the Mental Competency Evaluation Process

It is astonishing to almost everyone examining this situation closely that Todd Giffen could possibly be pronounced mentally incompetent and unfit for trial, let alone by a practicing psychologist supposedly trained in evaluating people’s mental soundness and levels of comprehension. While the language used in those messages to Senators presents as objectionable to many (discussed further below), the steady stream of information issuing from Todd from his jail cell over CorrLinks, inclusive of an emergency injunction appeal, a habeas corpus writ petition, and a complaint to the Oregon State Bar on his attorney suggests he is quite mentally sound, aware not merely of the legal process and keen to assist counsel in working on his defense, but cognizant of his Constitutional rights, protective case law, and questioning of his attorney’s strategies.

Citing specific cases in the past which have addressed competency evaluations, Todd Giffen writes in an email:

“Competency evaluations and such, can only be ordered in custody, if bail has been denied. Per United States v Song, 530 Fed Appx 255 (2012).

A competency evaluation if the defendant objects should not be done by the US attorney general, but by defendant’s own chosen doctor, per United States v Weathers (2004, DC NM) 374 F Supp 2d 957.

This means we should have the right to exclude the US Attorney General report from the record, because it was ordered illegally, and they have to allow my doctors to testify in the US Attorney General psychologist’s place.

This is because the competency hearing is considered a “adversial process,” meaning it is my side of the story, versus the US attorney general’s side (US Attorney’s office, etc).

They are not supposed to exclusively rely on the US attorney to provide all the witnesses and testimony which would make the process one sided.

Bail hearing, statute rights, and time limits must be strictly construed: United States v Al-azzawy (1985, Ca9) 768 F.2d 1141. Indicates also competency hearing statute has to be construed strictly.”

Dr. Farber, Todd’s psychologist reports from a conversation with Mr. Bofferding that the judge ordered a competency evaluation because Todd spoke out of turn in court, calling out and thereby disrespecting the judge. Todd responds he spoke out only after the judge had ordered a competency evaluation, because he felt his attorney was not speaking for him, and wished to protest that he had a right to call for his own psychologist to conduct a competency evaluation.

United States v Gillenwater, 717 F.3d 1070, 1080 – states that a defendant must speak up if his lawyer or judge is abusing him, otherwise he loses the right to call witnesses or testify. My attorney tried to say…that I had been found incompetent solely for one reason: I spoke out in court.

But I did this after the judge ruled I would be sent for a competency eval, without calling (my psychologist) to testify as he had prepared to be there Dec 5th.

This means I did not have an outburst, but an objection as the US Court of Appeals ruled I must do to preserve my rights for appeal.

Read Gillenwater. the case law states the right to testify comes from the 6th amendment, “compulsory process clause,” which says you have the right to “compulsory process for finding/bringing forth witnesses for your favor/defense.” This includes yourself, ability to call yourself as a witness, and calling other witnesses at the hearing.

You have the right also under the statute.Under 18 USC 4241(c) I think, or (d), which links over to your rights at “18 USC 4247(d).” Under 4247(d) it says, “you shall be represented by counsel (it is not optional), shall be afforded opportunity to testify, subpoena and call witnesses, cross examine, and present evidence by proffer or otherwise.”

Furthermore in Gillenwater, it makes note that previously, the court had held you also have a constitutional right to be present at your competency hearing.”

In a message relayed through his attorney at a court hearing held in his absence on March 20 at the US District Court in Oregon, it was Todd, ironically who informed the judge—through his attorney Mr. Bofferding—that due process and fundamental fairness were violated by the US Marshalls’ not transporting him there in time for the hearing, and the Eighth Amendment violated in subjecting him to the cruel and unusual punishment of holding him a month beyond the competency evaluation at SeaTac Jail, right after the US attorney Mr. Huynh had told the judge the medical evaluation had found Todd incompetent and “not fit to proceed.” Clearly, Todd is mentally competent enough to have a healthy recall of the law and his own rights—which must necessarily put the whole of this supposed 2-hour psychological evaluation pronouncing “unfitness” and “incompetency” into question.

Mr. Bofferding relayed that Todd and many supportive callers advocating on his behalf called for him to be released, and made some attempts to get the case dismissed on violation of due process but was unsuccessful. This March 20 hearing closed with intent to postpone the competency hearing to a later date when Todd could be present to discuss the psychologist’s report. The transcript of this court hearing was obtained at cost by the human rights organization Psych Rights and can be read in full here..

Complaints about Attorney Who Refuses to Let Defendant Testify, Call Witnesses, or File Appeals, Extended Jail Stay in Unsafe Conditions, Communications With Human Rights Advocates Prevented, Appeal Not Filed

Todd has reported via email from the Seattle and Nevada jails that this attorney has not been supportive, did not advocate for a bail hearing, nor ensured a competency hearing in time, permitted his overlong jail stay and exposure to dangerous inmates without advocating on his behalf in unsafe conditions where he reports gang member activity, whistling harassment, and on March 17 being threatened by an inmate after lockdown with razors, his bed splashed with water, and all his legal paperwork stolen—in an incident which caused him to press the panic button, in an emergency call for help which was left blithely unanswered by guards. Had his competency hearing been held in time, he says, he would not have been held so long in the jail, from where he wrote that he feared for his life. He also reported that he received no medical care in the jail for breathing and concussion symptoms from continued remote directed-energy technologies being used on him and that “upon arriving at Seatac, the psychologist Dr. Cynthia Low even told me “We don’t allow any inmates to receive physical care here. You won’t get any of the treatment necessary for your condition here,” then at all subsequent meetings with all doctors they ignored my medical state, refused to evaluate me, refused to diagnose me, discriminated on me, and waited for my death.”

He also states that the attorney Todd Bofferding refused to file his appeals, stating this was because Todd had been declared incompetent by the psychological evaluation, and says he openly threatened him with forced psychiatric drugging, telling Todd he would ask the judge to strap him down and force psychiatric medication on him, and is currently appealing to the Judge in his case, Judge Mustafa Kasubhai for a change of attorney. A call made at time of writing by this reporter to the attorney has not elicited comment yet.

In seemingly obstructive manner, Kelly Wallace has also reported that this attorney expressed skepticism about the authenticity of the over 150 signatures (from people worldwide familiar with Todd’s activism or in concern for his situation) on a Change.org petition she created for the judge to release Todd Giffen, saying they were not handwritten but electronic and so would not be accepted by the court because “We’re not millennials but all baby-boomers here,” and questioning whether any of them knew Todd.

Currently, further violations of due process and basic rights appear to be ongoing as Todd was made incommunicado for a few days recently, with the Polk County Jail’s computer systems and phones both suddenly breaking down, Kelly Wallace reports, as human rights advocates discussing his situation and seeking to advise him were cut off from communications with him—directly after putting money into the system set up to permit emails and phone calls. This absurdly timed breakdown merely adds to the train of indignities and encroachments on basic rights and denial of human services that Todd, and presumably everyone else held at Polk County Jail, have experienced lately. (At time of writing, phone services had been restored, shortly after this matter was reported in draft here.)

The latest news from Kelly Wallace who has been helping Todd with filings is that a clerk from the Oregon District Court called to say the appeal sent in had not been awarded a docking number nor sent to the Appellate Court of the Ninth Circuit Court in San Francisco as required but had been sent to the judge in Todd’s case, which sounds like another violation of process since the whole point of an appeal is to send it to an external court and judge who can address and act immediately on the appeal.

Provocative and Misleading Language Use in Messages Versus Primary Interest in Jury Trial and Not Violence

While Todd’s friends and psychologist Dr. Seth Farber advise that Todd issue an apology for his use of questionable language in order to persuade the FBI to drop the charges against him, Todd has long expressed interest in a jury trial and in bringing forward all matters related to unlawful targeting and non-consensual neuro-experimentation in this country, in interests of seeking justice and freedom from technology abuse for all “Targeted Individuals” who are really falsely-accused subjects of surveillance and of Fusion-Center-trafficked non-consensual military and Intelligence experimentation and testing with emerging brain and electronic technologies, as several reports by this writer and others illustrate.

Dr. Farber stresses that although Todd has used provocative language in his messages to Senators DeFazio and Wyden, he can testify that Todd is not and has never been interested in violence and has always been focused rather on addressing all abuses he reports against him and others legally through the court system. “I can testify in Court that having known Todd for 5 years and counseled him, he does not have fantasies of committing any acts of physical violence…(but of) revenge in Court.”

Indeed, Todd has apparently been striving to communicate with legislators for many years, reporting human rights abuses both he and other wrongfully targeted Americans have experienced, urging them—without success–to put a new law in place to ban non-consensual experimentation and end the Deep State abuse of their constituents.

The language of frustration he has used in these messages with words such as “rape,” “blood pouring,” and “kill” is addressed in a recent document he sent from the Seatac jail via CorrLinks to this writer, Dr. Farber, Kelly Wallace, Jim Gottstein of Psych Rights, and others, outlining his situation wherein he implies that these words he used related only to the court system’s death penalty and states he is well within his rights to promise a jury trial and the verdict of a death penalty (putatively pronounced by such a court proceeding) to elected representatives who ignore his pleas for justice in the face of long-term abuse with stealth weaponry and psychological harassment he has suffered for many years. “A person has a 1st amendment right to discuss abuse happening to them, and to provide an assessment of the law that a Congressman or Senator will receive the death penalty if the law was enforced after a jury trial.”

Dr. Farber notes that Todd wrote: “Pete, I am gunna rape you and your staff for vulnerable person abuse and end your career….Todd explains: “Vulnerable person abuse refers to ORS 124.100 a statute I intend to sue and bankrupt his staffers with for covering up and hiding my physical and financial abuse.

Todd clearly did not mean he intended to rape anyone–let alone the whole staff. Obviously what he intended to convey is “I will get back at you and your staff for vulnerable person abuse and I will end your career…” Todd explains…THROUGH LEGAL MEANS.” Dr. Farber comments, “Even as metaphor it’s poor use,” but he understands Todd “feels raped.”

Further, Dr. Farber states: “Language is equivocal. When a stand-up comic is doing a good set and his audience is laughing he will typically say later, “I was killing up there.” If he’s doing poorly he’ll say “I’m dying up here.” Todd–unfortunately–sometime uses language in this way in the wrong context…But because he has a brilliant mind and is an autodidact his idea of “making a killing” is Winning in Court. He’s not a fighter. I invited Todd to be a co-presenter with me (which he happily accepted) on 3 occasions at a large forum–he made a killing.”

Conflicted Mention of Mass Shooters; Reports of Neurotechnology Use

The primary reason for Todd’s arrest and incarceration, by record in the FBI affidavit is threats made via interstate communications and stalking but some of the information reported in the affidavit appears to point to a threat assessment of possibility for future violence.

In one of his messages to Senator Ron Wyden, Todd has mentioned other reporting victims of neuroweaponry abuse who ended up succumbing to Manchurian-candidate-style neurotech manipulation and engaged tragically in mass shootings, including Aaron Alexis, Myron May, and Esteban Santiago; he also mentioned the Unabomber and Miriam Carey and stated these were all false-flag operations (an opinion shared by many) and that he too was being abused in similar ways with neurotechnology .

FBI agent Damara Schlitz’s affidavit describes and projects Myron May and Esteban Santiago in footnotes as mentally ill with reported “delusions” of being targeted by Government—previous news reports in corporate or mainstream news media have also portrayed these men as delusional; deeper probings however into their lives and history of disclosure show that both Myron May and Esteban Santiago had complained of being abused with neurotechnology and ELFs by government agencies, as also did the Navy yard shooter Aaron Alexis.

In any case, the FBI—who is involved currently in studying and probably by this point operating neuro surveillance technologies with the Department of Justice on Americans as plainly detailed in this 1994 Memorandum of Understanding between the DOJ and DOD, and in 1990s Defense news reports of US government collaboration with Russian institutes in the study and development of “psycho-corrective” technologies—aka stealth neuro-modification technologies–has famously embarked on a duplicitous strategy of disavowing any knowledge of neuroweaponry, neuro-surveillance technologies, less-than-lethal anti-personnel weapons, and psycho-corrective technologies, and engaging in outright lies therefore in this matter, choosing, by insidious, weaponized strategy essentially treasonous to the American people, to dismiss all reporting victims of such neurotechnology or ELF/DEW usage on them as delusional.

Excerpt/Defense News 1993

Excerpt/Defense News 1993

Fortunately however—and probably decades after the fact–other public disclosure of neurotechnology usage is increasing today. Dr. James Giordiano, military neuroscientist and neuroethicist at Georgetown University has publicly discoursed on the current examination and use of Neuro Surveillance and Neuro Monitoring technologies by the Criminal Justice system in his lectures, as these two recordings (videos posted here) demonstrate: Predictive Neuroscience: Facts, Fictions, and Fears of Scanning Brains and Reading Minds and Predictive Neurotechnology – Minority Report and More.

Image: Still from Predictive Neuroscience: Facts ,Fictions, Fears

Dr. Giordiano has also specifically stated that the brains of certain selected targeted individuals are being studied—by the military and Intelligence institutions he represents—in his disclosive lecture on the state of neuroweaponry and modern neuroscience in the US today, From Bench to Battlefield; it is precisely this which several hundreds of reporting victims are calling attention to, that their brains are being non-consensually invaded and assaulted with military neurotechnology.

False Diagnoses of Schizophrenia Are Being Used in a False Reality Construct to Suppress All Disclosure of Inhumane Neurotechnology Use on Citizens

The inexplicable attitude by the FBI to publicly refer to all reportage of military bio-communications technologies reported both by mass shooters and reporting victims of such neurotechnology abuse as indicative of “mental illness,” “schizophrenia,” and, notably, “untreated mental illness” is evidenced in public statements made nearly after every mass shooting where the issue of hearing voices and directives, or being subjected to stalking and ELF or microwave weapon abuse has been raised, as in the cases recently of Nikolas Cruz, the Parkland shooter or Travis Reinking, held for the Waffle-House shooting.

This policy by the FBI is echoed at the level of police departments and therefore directs the responses of media, psychiatrists, and the court system, with all reporting victims of non-consensual neurotechnology experimentation being peremptorily dismissed as paranoid and delusional, requiring psychiatric treatment with anti-psychotics. Wrongful diagnoses of perfectly mentally well people reporting military technology use on them therefore is an ongoing subject of concern to this reporter and is a continuing subject of investigation at Ramola D Reports. Authoritarian Psychiatry KGB-style, as many psychiatrists themselves will readily admit, has taken up residence today in the USA, and becomes a tool of suppression of authentic reportage from the public in this scenario of non-consensual neuro/DEW experimentation which thousands of Americans (and people worldwide) are reporting today. The threat of Involuntary Holds, forced Psych-Commits, and forced Psych-Drugging is held over the head of every single reporting victim—as this writer learned one year ago at this time, compelled to notify local bodies in Massachusetts that Investigative Journalism is Not Untreated Mental Illness.

Interestingly, Todd reports an unusual encounter with a fellow inmate who was apprehended for exactly the same charges as himself, writing seemingly threatening emails to Congressmen Peter DeFazio and Ron Wyden, whom he believes is an undercover agent, and who gave him confirmation that he is indeed the subject of military experimentation with neurotechnology and remote brain surveillance which he terms part of Project Stargate or the NSA ESP program.

Inside the criminal complaint from (XYZ) is listed emails he sent to Peter DeFazio and Ron Wyden, including one that reads, “Time to die, Pete.” He said his emails were from a script he was going by. He said “they won’t let me hang anyone else in Oregon but you two,” referring to Ron Wyden and Peter DeFazio, who he refers to as his past friends, but they are extremely corrupt. He told me he knows a lot about the corruption of Peter DeFazio and Ron Wyden, knows them to be liars, hiding national security knowledge and abuses against Americans.”

He told me he’s an ONI, Office of Naval Intelligence Officer, a US Navy Ship Captain, Linguistic Warfare, and Blinding Laser Weapon expert. He told me the Secretary of Naval Intelligence is the highest up most powerful person in the world, even above the President…He shared the specifications on a technology invented during World War 2 that enabled the Germans and United States governments to communicate brain to brain, bypassing language barriers, and human sensory organs. Think about it, an Englishman speaks English, German man speaks German, but by communicating brain to brain they can understand each other without need for translation. This indicates the thought process of the brain are identical from each person in general, and can be read and then beamed into another (person’s) head, and understood by the receiving brain (telepathy)…He wrote me a letter and provided me some details, saying USCYBERCOM was responsible for doing it if I ever heard voices in my head. He wrote a letter sample I could send to them to help them investigate. He said they were good people.

He said the President is very aware of the technology and they’ve targeted him with it, and so the Secret Service actually provides protection from it, including scanning for ultrasound and electromagnetic frequencies which can be used to pass messages into the President’s head. He also described the technology being used to command legions of Armies, by passing messages and instructions directly into their heads, which can also be used for movie production in case people forget their lines, as the lines will be beamed directly into their heads.

Far from such stories being fantasy or sci-fi, and in support of remote brain technology experimentation reported by many today, the issue of “Neuro Cognitive Weapons” was recently mentioned by a Defense medical planner as being a subject of high concern by the US Navy Surgeon General at a conference on emerging biodefense technologies—obviously not demonstrating schizophrenia herself in doing so.

 

Todd also reports that both he and Tyrone Dew, another reporting victim of non-consensual neuro-experimentation, wrote to Esteban Santiago’s public defense attorney at the time of his trial, informing him about the existence of neurotechnologies which could produce the effects of voices and radio-hypnosis Santiago reported and acted on, as well as referred him to ex-DOD/CIA cybernetics scientist Dr. Robert Duncan for confirmation, in order to establish true defense for Santiago—as being under CIA or NSA Mind Control Technology, but that their reports went unacknowledged; in the usual Mass-Ignoring-of-CIA-MK-ULTRA-Present-day-Neurotechnology way, Santiago was considered mentally ill, and in the face of the death penalty, pled guilty and was condemned to life in prison.

False diagnoses of paranoia, delusion, and mental illness by any standard can be seen by any of us to be reckless, irresponsible, and fraudulent in the extreme, but it is precisely this False Reality Construct (replete with false diagnoses by either uninformed psychologists and psychiatrists or participating, complicit ones) in this age of indisputable advancements in DOD, DOJ, and CIA Neurotechnologies and Remote Human Access anti-personnel radar/sonic weapons that a collusion of “authorities” with FBI in the lead and surely CIA and NSA in the wings, not to mention US Navy, US Airforce, US Army, JSOC (Joint Special Ops Command) et al has succeeded treasonously in perpetrating on the American populace.

The Issue of Threat of Violence, Path to Future Violence Implied by FBI

Within the context of threat of violence, which is what the FBI has apprehended Todd Giffen on, an email from DOD/CIA scientist and whistleblower Dr. Robert Duncan cited by Todd to Senator Ron Wyden has also been included in FBI agent Damara Schlitz’s affidavit, wherein Dr. Duncan appears to suggest that the government neurotechnology he is aware of is likely to work on influencing him toward violence against himself or someone else–”I know how angry you are. It is unlikely they will kill you but the torture sure feels like it. The real issue will be if they can get you to kill someone else or yourself. That will be your internal battle for awhile.”; Dr. Farber disputes this notion and states firmly that this was never Todd’s conundrum; his avenging and revenging fantasies were always about taking his abusers to court and seeing them prosecuted in a jury trial.

High Intelligence and Sanity Despite Repeated Childhood Abuse, Hospital Abuse, Whistleblower Retaliation, and Police Abuse

The notion of Todd’s mental competency, to be discussed in this upcoming hearing on April 8, Dr. Farber reaffirms really should not be in question, since, he notes, Todd is someone of high IQ and an enquiring mind.

Todd’s website Oregonstatehospital.net/Click to visit

Other reporting victims of non-consensual neurotechnology experimentation note that Todd has made a study of and has a deep understanding of civil rights and criminal law; his meticulous research into mind control technologies and whistleblower testimonial is published online for all to see at his websites including obamasweapon.com and oregonstatehospital.net.

Todd’s website Obamasweapon.com/ Click to visit

Todd’s intelligence and sanity are further supported by Cathy Meadows, a psychologist who spent five hours evaluating Todd in 2013 and reports on the tragic story of his repeated abuse earlier during extended stay at Oregon State Hospital, whom he has sued. In her report she states: “While he hasn’t yet gone on to any type of higher education, Todd scored on the 99th percentile in science, and on the 88th percentile over-all, on his GED tests. He is very, very intelligent and, therefore, had successfully learned to deal with any and all abuses he endured as a child.

This report in fact—a must-read for all interested in excavating the truth–makes it clear that Todd has been the repeated victim of whistleblower retaliation after reporting sexual harassment and abuse by a female medical worker at Oregon State Hospital. The video testimonial by his grandfather Clyde Giffen on his website and photographs posted there also bear witness to the inexplicably abusive treatment he was subjected to when young by local police. Examining all of these matters including noting that Todd was raised mostly by his grandparents after experiencing a variety of unsettling moves and abusive treatment after his parents’ divorce very young, it becomes clear that he has indeed been a vulnerable youth and adult who may have been opportunistically abused by “authorities.”

Stealth Neuro-Influence Technologies Step Into Focus

Ironically, incarcerating and seeking to psychiatrically commit Todd Giffen now after he sent those emails and Facebook Messenger messages to Senators—characterizing him as a potential threat and potential mass shooter—all of which is nonsensical according to his psychologist Dr. Farber, has succeeded currently in drawing attention to the stealth neuro-influence neurotechnologies which he is reporting, which may be entirely responsible for the content and controversial language of those emails.

Because indeed the power and danger of these neuro influence weapons using electromagnetic frequencies to alter cognitive processes and reshape behavior as well as commandeer human will and intention—as understood by scientist, whistleblower and reporting victim testimonial as well as patents, is apparently so extreme that it can induce word, phrase, and sentence choice and use, and could very well have induced Todd to express his frustration verbally in just such heightened and metaphoric yet socially unacceptable terms. While mainstream media today forbears from covering the facts about mind control or neurotechnologies today, an early op-ed in 1967 in the New York Times titled Push Button People highlighting neuroscientist Jose Delgado’s experiments with monkeys where mothers could be persuaded by implanted electrodes to reject their own offspring reveals that neuroscientists were well aware of the capabilities of EMFs and neurotechnology way back then.

Push1Push2If only the CIA, NSA, FBI, DOD would come clean and confess and accept culpability for their use of these brain control technologies randomly, en masse, and specifically on the populace—in order to offer the public clear and truthful insight into the scope and capability of these neurotechnologies, this situation would never have come about.

It is to be hoped that Todd issues a meaningful apology to those Senators and is successful in having them and the FBI drop these charges of threat and stalking, and that his competency hearing on April 8, with Dr. Farber testifying in defence of his competence veers in his favor. Meanwhile, interested readers are encouraged to write formally to the court and speak on behalf of Todd, seeking his release and speaking for his mental competency and sanity, especially if they know him well and are aware that he is truly not an advocate of violence, but rather a victim of abuses as he states, and therefore really should be assisted, and not incarcerated by the very State which has unlawfully experimented on him.

Court information is as follows—many thanks to Kelly Wallace for her research and tireless human rights advocacy.

Honorable Magistrate Judge Mustafa T. Kasubhai .

Address: Wayne L. Morse United States Courthouse Room, 5400 405 East Eighth Avenue Eugene, Oregon 97401 .

Chambers # 541- 431-4120

Case Management Information Courtroom Deputy: Jackie Klein # 541-431-4119

Case Administrator/Docket Clerk Information

Fax # 5414314109

Related:

Public Disclosure on Neuro Weapons and Neuro Technologies In Use Today

Former US Navy Officer Walks Across America to Expose Covert Targeting and Neuro-Experimentation Program

Deep State Treason–NSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Reveals Massive Surveillance Abuse of Innocent Americans, Civilians Worldwide Beyond FISA Memo: #BIGGERthanReleaseTheMemo

Ramola D/No Longer True: The NSA “Isn’t Getting Violent Internally in the US”: Millions Today in US Are Targeted with RF/Scalar/Sonic Weapons, Nano Weapons, Neuro Weapons, Chem/Bio Weapons

NSA Whistleblower Karen Melton-Stewart – Your Tax Dollars and FISA Abuse

Open Season on Targets: Blacklisted Individuals, Extreme Abuse in Targeting, Secretive Lab-Rat Exploitation, & Massive Establishment Cover-Up

NSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart: To the Authorities of Every Level of Government: Re-Declaration of Rights July 4, 2018

Ramola D Reports | Report # 106: CIA and FBI Whistleblowers Barbara Hartwell And Geral Sosbee Discuss The Truth About Surveillance Abuses

2016 BRAIN Initiatives: Neuro Crime, Neuro Warfare, DARPA/CIA Brain Experimentation, Neuro Ethics, and Non-Consensual Experimentees

Ramola D Reports/Report #56: Geral Sosbee, FBI Whistleblower Reports Massive Crime By FBI

Geral Sosbee: Collapse of Constitutional Government of The United States of America & The Responsibility For The Collapse (FBI/CIA/DOD); Call for New Nuremberg Trial

Washington’s Blog: The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today

Documents Relevant to Todd’s Case:

Thanks very much to Psych Rights for obtaining these transcripts.

Transcript of Dec 5, 2018 Hearing, United States Vs. Todd Giffen

Transcript of March 20, 2019 Hearing, United States Vs. Todd Giffen
My Investigative Reporter Statement for Todd Giffen

Seth Farber, Ph.D: The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at least retain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“) 

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016). 

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

 

Back to Top

TIs and No-Touch Torture

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned CitizenWhy I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009, The Complex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others: 

Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008,In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control“Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

 

Back to Top

Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind JusticeResearch Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s —  psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” —  through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to this directive, non-lethal weapons are to be used on the government’s domestic “adversaries”. The definition of “adversary” now appears to include any American whose activities are disapproved of by the military or by law enforcement. The directive states (emphasis added): “The term ‘adversary’ is used above in its broadest sense, including those who are not declared enemies but who are engaged in activities we wish to stop. This policy does not preclude legally authorized domestic use of the nonlethal weapons by United States military forces in support of law enforcement.” (Ibid, p.157,  The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons —  and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

 

Back to Top

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE  | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

Do not engage with the voices in your head.

If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert DuncanRamola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity —  woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

 A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.

Officers standing over the body of Myron May on Nov. 20, 2014, after the shooting at Florida State University.

The vast majority of people with psychosis never resort to violence. Still, studies suggest that a small number of those experiencing psychotic episodes — especially paranoid thoughts, accompanied by voices making commands — are more likely to act on hostile urges than people without a mental illness.

And what if paranoid thoughts are put in their mind by the CIA? Is the percentage of identified TIs — who McPhate claims are paranoid psychotics —  or real paranoids more likely to act on hostile urges than the angry non-TI, non-psychotic? McPhate presents no evidence to confirm this.

Furthermore several psychiatrists have demonstrated that the commonly prescribed “anti-depressants” (Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors or SSRI) actually cause some patients to become violent. Dr Peter Breggin writes, “It’s not the patient’s ‘mental illness’ that causes violence, it’s the drugs…[A]ntidepressants can and do cause violence on every level from people who feel more irritable or less loving toward their families to people who commit domestic violence or carry out mass murders.” (See Peter Breggin, July 25, Mad in America, “Violence Caused by Antidepressants”, accessed November, 2016).

Yet the idea that TIs and other “non-compliant psychotics” have a tendency toward violence is an integral part of the psychiatric metanarrative — a justification for forcing so-called patients, including TIs, to take psychiatric drugs, sometimes the very drugs that cause violence!

Many in the T.I. community, as anyone would, have repudiated the shootings by Mr. Alexis and Mr. May. But some also harbor troubling views about their perceived oppressors. They question how people could be so cruel.

Why is this troubling? Don’t most people take the view that their oppressors are cruel? It is troubling because McPhate accepts the psychiatric metanarrative which posits that the TI, the non-compliant psychotic, has a tendency to retaliate against her enemies — and thus requires psychiatric restraint — forced drugging.

Karen Stewart of Tallahassee, Fla., believes large numbers of regular people have been brainwashed by the National Security Agency into thinking that she is a traitor or terrorist. Wherever she goes, she says — to church, to the grocery store, to the doctor’s office — they are there, watching.

McPhate withholds critical information from the readers: Karen Stewart worked for the NSA as an Intelligence analyst from 1982 to 2010 — for 28 years. For 28 years she was never considered a psychotic. The biographical facts that are omitted buttress the TI metanarrative whereas the false depiction of Ms. Stewart strips her of her credentials, her authority, and reduces her to the status of an ordinary non-compliant lunatic. McPhate’s inaccurate depiction serves one purpose however — it strengthens the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative.

Stewart writes elsewhere that she was “railroaded out” of NSA

“just two years before I could retire because I had dared ask the Inspector General to investigate a matter involving work credit and promotion theft. I moved to Florida in 2011 to get away and wait for the lawsuit (appeal to forbidden retaliatory firing) to be adjudicated by the Judge Lawrence Gallagher at the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) in Baltimore.” (Washington’s BlogNSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Speaks Candidly About Illegal and Criminal NSA & FBI Programs of Organized Stalking and Electronic Harassment in the USA & Abroad)

She states,

“Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed-Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.”(See The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Karen Stewart, NSA Whistleblower: Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place in the United States.

It baffles her, she said. But worse, “It makes me angry to see how many people in this country are sociopaths. They are absolute groupthink drones,” she said. “I don’t even consider them human anymore.”

“A need for meaning’

Susan Clancy, a Harvard-trained psychologist who has researched people who believe they’ve been abducted by aliens, said it could be extremely difficult to dissuade patients who have latched onto beliefs that they think explain their delusions.

“I think it’s a need for meaning and a need to understand your life and the problems you’re having,” she said. “You’re not some meaningless nobody. You’re being followed by the C.I.A.”

McPhate brings in yet another professional — this one from Harvard — to give weight to the psychiatric metanarrative. Yet he made contact with a number of former whistle-blowers, and quotes only one — without even mentioning her career at NSA.

Yet many of the people McPhate interviewed were not “meaningless nobodies.” Stewart was an NSA employee for decades. Robert Duncan, the whistle-blower whom he interviewed, is a former CIA employee and a scientific prodigy with multiple degrees from Ivy League schools. John Hall was a physician. Rosanne Schneider, whom he interviewed (but does not mention), is an author and artist. And furthermore there are numerous highly accomplished TIs. But including them would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative.

In that way, Dr. Clancy said, the behavior shares a trait with religious belief: To abandon it would be life upending.

Paula Trespas, Mr. Trespas’s mother, said she avoided debating with him.

“It wasn’t something that he was making up,” she said. “He really felt the way he felt and experienced what he experienced. I got to the point where I was just finally saying to him: “I’m very, very sad that you have to go through this. I wish that there was something that I could do.’ ”

The big hope is that society will wake up to what’s happening and put a stop to it, those who feel targeted say. In some cases, they do seek psychiatric help. In others, the delusions subside. For the rest, the prognosis isn’t good, psychiatrists say. Many contemplate suicide.

Mr.Trespas, now 49, says he went so far as to prepare a rope.

Sitting at a coffee shop in Brooklyn last month, he says the stalking has thankfully quieted down. But he says his harassers have also been seeding his body with Morgellons, a painful, insectlike infestation of the skin that many doctors say is psychosomatic.

He is gaunt, with weary, sad eyes. It’s been eight years since it all began, he says. He can’t hold a job. His friends have drifted away.

The TI community includes a wide range of persons — many are accomplished writers or professionals, as McPhate noted above. Yet by choosing one of the loneliest, most confused, and most forlorn TIs, one who is not even sure of the TI metanarrative, he reinforces the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative. This is a self-identified TI who may or may not be a TI. (Many TIs have reported that they have encountered disinformation agents posing as TIs.)

The online community has been a crucial support, he says. “But we don’t know exactly what’s happening,” he says. “Maybe we’re believing the wrong thing. I don’t know. That’s why I try to keep my mind open about who and what and why and how.”

Trepas is the only TI I’ve heard of who thinks “maybe we’re believing the wrong thing.”

One thing he is certain of though, he says: He’s not crazy.

McPhate ends the story on the cautionary motif of the psychiatric metanarrative: TIs are psychotics who refuse to accept that they have an illness — they are non-compliant psychotics.

It is a sad fact that the mainstream media has followed the lead of the psychiatric “authorities” in dismissing the allegations of TIs and defining them all as non-compliant treatment-resistant psychotics. They thus help to promulgate the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. Journalists and mental health workers rest their case ultimately on articles like that of Sheridan and James. This article has the appearance of a genuine “investigation,” of a scientific study — but it is all hot air. It substitutes reliability for validity, the agreement or shared fantasy of mental health professionals for correspondence to social reality. In other words the hidden sub-text of pseudo-investigations like Sheridan and James is, “It is so because we the experts say it is so.”

It is my hope that in the future The New York Times will serve its function as the fourth estate. Instead of dismissing TIs and promulgating the psychiatric metanarrative, McPhate or another journalist will seriously investigate TIs’ claims. Instead of interviewing only the most troubled TIs, and thus, wittingly or unwittingly, reinforcing the psychiatric claim that TIs are covert psychotics, this journalist would interview some of the more articulate spokespersons for TIs (some of whom are mentioned above), and seriously consider their allegations.

He or she would not treat psychiatric opinions as revealed truth but would give voice to dissidents who do not subscribe to the psychiatric metanarrative. The journalist would present the testimony of a few of the whistle-blowers who have worked in intelligence — Robert Duncan is today the most prominent and outspoken of former employees of American intelligence who worked on cybernetic weaponry. While not revealing classified information, Duncan has exposed the advanced technologies used against innocent persons. As a whistle-blower he follows in the tradition of men like Edward Snowden and William Binney whose views as a supporter of TIs could also be solicited.

The torture of American citizens described by TIs is a violation of international proscriptions against torture and against non-consensual experiments on subjects. The policy of both APAs prohibit psychiatrists and psychologists from inflicting harm upon anyone. The Coalition for an Ethical Psychology wrote:

“The APA and other health professional organizations have a duty to support the ethical practice of the profession, which includes protecting their members from complicity in human rights abuses and other violations of international law.”(See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, Preserve Do-No-Harm for Military Psychologists: Coalition Responds to Department of Defense Letter to the APA, accessed November, 2016).

By labeling TIs as “psychotic”, mental health professionals are wittingly or unwittingly complicitous in the most serious kinds of human rights abuses — in crimes against humanity.

 

Back to Top

The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

The Coalition for Ethical Psychology has served an important and exemplary role within the American Psychological Association.They were formed in 2006 in response to psychologists’ participation at Guantanamo as mentioned above. Their goal is “to expose and oppose psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse with a national security rationale.” They state,

“We are alarmed that the APA, the world’s largest mental health organization, has overlooked, and even colluded with, subversion of psychology to state power. The ethical commitment of psychology as a profession is to improve human welfare universally.” (See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, About.)

This is a far more subversive goal than the founders may realize, since the entire mental health system is a regime of surveillance and control — of the “mentally ill” — and a servant of State power. CEP places APA members between conflicting mandates: On the one hand, is the ancient injunction of the helping professions to “do no harm” and the ethical obligation to serve the universal good, and on the other hand is their perceived obligation to the state to control trouble or troubling individuals. This is a conflict of interests considering the repressive and often punitive nature of the modern state. Another factor compromising their ability to help clients is the professionals’ financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry, which has been enormously lucrative for mental health professionals and leads them to place profits before people. This conflict is most obvious with psychiatrists but it affects everyone working in the “mental health” system.

The mental health system is a social control agency similar to law enforcement and criminal justice, although distinctive in many respects, as shown above. The linchpin of the system is the administration of psychiatric drugs disguised as medicine: Psychiatric patients in the public sector — state mental hospital or group homes and “out-patient treatment” — are often subjected to involuntary psychiatric “out-patient” commitment (most heinously, the involuntary injection of psychotropic drugs). Involuntary treatment has recently itself been declared to be a violation of international law and human rights by the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities. (See Tina Minkowitz, Mad in America, Oct 13 2013, “UN Prohibition of Psychiatric Commitment: Review and Analysis”.)

Dr. Bonnie Burstow writes,

“Take away the medical veneer and what we have here are substances given for non-existent disorders [problems in living], all of which by their nature create chemical imbalances, all of which disable, a number of which are associated with violence, all of which profoundly damage the brain. . . Is damage as treatment the best we can do? Is a society of rampant iatrogenic damage acceptable?” (Bonnie Burstow, Psychiatry and the Business of Madness, 2015, New York, p.200)

An ethical psychology or psychiatry is impossible in an unethical society. As R.D. Laing pointed out, the well-adjusted bomber pilot — dropping bombs on women and children of the “enemy” — serving the interests of the State and of corporations, would be considered “mentally healthy” by mental health professionals although he is committing war crimes that violates elementary moral norms. That is, in an ethically perverse society, conformity and adjustment is sanctified and murder in service of the state assumes a façade of moral legitimacy.

The organizers of Coalition for an Ethical Psychology (CEP) are therapists in private practice (not in the public sector) and thus relatively free of State coercion. They are often unaware that the public mental health system is normally abusive. Abuse is not an aberration. CEP and others dedicated to realizing the ideal of an ethical society seek to expose unethical practices in the helping professions, and pressure professionals to uphold transcendent ethical norms. Every act of exposure and protest — no matter how selective — gives witness to values that transcend the mental health system and the State to which it is customarily subordinate.

I hope I have made it clear that many or most self-identified TIs are victims of no-touch torture and/or non-consensual experimentation. The declaration that all TIs are delusional is based upon premises that do not stand up to historical examination. Thus, the promulgation of the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs by professionals who have failed to investigate the allegations of thousands of self-identified Tis is a failure to take its own ethical mandate — to improve human welfare — seriously. If not an act of deliberate deception, it is an act of bullshitting, to quote Levine. Sheridan and Young’s pseudo-scientific study (see above) claims to have “found” that all TIs are delusional psychotics and thus enables professionals to silence and “treat” them, while avoiding the inner moral conflict that would ordinarily result from condoning and facilitating (no-touch) torture.

Like psychologists’ participation in the torture regime in Guantanamo, treating TIs as psychotic is a blatant, witting or unwitting, subservience to Deep State actions that are violations of human rights as recognized by international law. It is comparable to the Soviet psychiatry “treatment” of dissidents. The fact that a small minority of persons within the American Psychological Association have succeeded on occasion in pushing the group to take the high road and stand up for universal human welfare against the dictates of the State is testimony to the power of the individual inspired by transcendent moral ideals. Had the individuals who formed CEP not had such a strong commitment to the truth, had they not forced APA membership to confront their leaders’ involvement in designing a torture regime, the APA would still permit its members to participate in torture under the guise of “national security.” As Bruce Levine said, it’s easier to continue to bullshit than to face the truth. CEP provides a lesson in leadership, in creative maladjustment, for all of us.

A logical next step for an organization like CEP which opposes “psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse” is to investigate the allegations of TIs and expose and oppose the a priori “diagnoses” of all TIs as psychotics. This focus may seem arbitrary or misleading since as stated, state-supported abuse is the norm in the mental health professions, but it has its own logic. Robert Whitaker and dissident professionals who have written for Mad in America oppose involuntary psychiatric drugging — another state-assisted abuse — but they would undoubtedly have no success in getting any professional body to publicly oppose involuntary drugging. Tina Minkowitz Esq., lawyer and psychiatric survivor, did however succeed in persuading the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities to assert forced treatment as a human rights abuse. (However UN bodies have little effect in the United States.) The CEP agenda must be guided by what is possible, and practical — and by the orientation of their own organization.

While treatment with brain-damaging drugs is the norm in the mental health system, overt torture is still regarded by most APA members with disdain — after all, it has no medical rationalization. Therefore it is possible that CEP could persuade members of the APA to oppose the routine labeling of TIs — without any investigation — as “psychotic.” (As I have shown, this diagnosis is “justified” by invalid studies.) An APA resolution of this kind would be publicized by the mainstream media, and would undermine the psychiatric metanarrative. Short of this, The New York Times and the mainstream media will continue to defer to Psychiatry and describe all TIs as non-compliant psychotics. Furthermore, while the corporate Press will continue to propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, it is time for journalists who have opposed US torture at Guantanamo and elsewhere, to expose no-touch torture on TIs and the complicity of mental health professionals in covering up these human rights abuses.

The therapeutic state fueled now by pharmaceutical industry grows without constraints while the Deep State operates without Congressional or public oversight. The development of a totalitarian regime — nominally a constitutional republic — in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America. The prevention of such a development is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system and disguised and justified as “medical” treatments for an ever increasing number of covert “psychotics.”

 

Back to Top

***

This article may be re-published or re-posted in full or part, with attribution and linkback, by granted permission of the author. Please share widely.

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our e